diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:19:44 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:19:44 -0700 |
| commit | 2dbd497c3ff59a1e77ec23aff6e05086392db926 (patch) | |
| tree | 2cc53acca4bf296a0afe6cfb0ffb68c1638b5a9a /20173-h | |
Diffstat (limited to '20173-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 20173-h/20173-h.htm | 9510 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20173-h/images/illus1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 89274 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20173-h/images/illus2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42246 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20173-h/images/illus3.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42958 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20173-h/images/illus4.jpg | bin | 0 -> 57134 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20173-h/images/illus5.jpg | bin | 0 -> 58005 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20173-h/images/illus6.jpg | bin | 0 -> 56420 bytes |
7 files changed, 9510 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/20173-h/20173-h.htm b/20173-h/20173-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6983e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/20173-h/20173-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9510 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Romance of Golden Star ..., by George Chetwynd Griffith</title> + <style type="text/css"> + + +p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + text-indent: 1em; + } + + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; + clear: both; + } + + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + +ins.correction {border-bottom-style: dotted; border-bottom-color: red; border-bottom-width:1px;} + + .pagenum { + visibility: hidden; + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + } + + + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + + + .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + .bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + .bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + .br {border-right: solid 2px;} + .bbox {border: solid 2px;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + + + .notes {border: dashed 1px;} + + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;} + + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 75%;} + + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Romance of Golden Star ..., by George +Chetwynd Griffith, Illustrated by Alfred Pearse</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Romance of Golden Star ...</p> +<p>Author: George Chetwynd Griffith</p> +<p>Release Date: December 23, 2006 [eBook #20173]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ROMANCE OF GOLDEN STAR ...***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Wilelmina Maillière<br /> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net/c/)</h3> +<p> </p> +<div class='notes'><p>Transcriber's note:</p> +<p>Some punctuation has been changed to meet contemporary standards.</p> +<p>Printer's errors: see the list of corrections at the end of the text.</p> +</div> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h4>THE ROMANCE OF +GOLDEN STAR ...</h4> + +<h5>George [Chetwynd] Griffith[-Jones]</h5> + +<p>Reprint Edition 1978 by Arno Press Inc.</p> + +<p>Editorial Supervision: MARIE STARECK</p> + +<p>Reprinted from a copy in The Library of +the University of California, Riverside</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i">[Pg i]</a></span></p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii">[Pg ii]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style='width: 45%;' /> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 427px;"> +<a name="Illustration_Hail_Son_of_the_Sun" id="Illustration_Hail_Son_of_the_Sun"></a><img src="images/illus1.jpg" width="427" height="650" alt="Hail, Son of the Sun! -- Page 78." title="Hail, Son of the Sun! -- Page 78." /> +<span class="caption">Hail, Son of the Sun! -- Page 78.</span> +</div> + + + + + +<h1>THE ROMANCE OF +GOLDEN STAR ...</h1> + + + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align='left'><h4>BY</h4> <h2>GEORGE GRIFFITH</h2> <h4>AUTHOR OF<br /><br />'THE ANGEL OF THE REVOLUTION,' <br />'OLGA ROMANOFF,' 'THE OUTLAWS <br />OF THE AIR,' 'VALDAR THE OFT-BORN,' <br />'BRITON OR BOER?' ETC., ETC.</h4></td><td align='left'><p>'<i>To that Son of the Sacred Race<br /> +who for Honour and Faith and<br /> +Love shall take the hand of a<br /> +pure virgin of his own holy blood<br /> +and with her pass fearless through<br /> +the Gate of Death into the shadows<br /> +which lie beyond shall be given the<br /> +glory of casting out the Oppressor<br /> +and raising the Rainbow Banner<br /> +once more above the Golden Throne<br /> +of the Incas. On that Throne he<br /> +shall sit and wield power and mete<br /> +out justice and mercy to the Children<br /> +of the Sun when the gloom<br /> +that is falling upon the Land of<br /> +the Four Regions shall have passed<br /> +away in the dawn of a brighter age.</i>' <br /><br /> +<span class="smcap">—The Prophecy contained<br />in the Ancient Legend<br /> +of Vilcaroya-Inca and<br />Golden Star, his Sister-Bride.</span></p></td></tr> +</table></div> + +<h3>ILLUSTRATED..</h3> +<h3>BY ALFRED PEARSE</h3> +<h2>LONDON: F. V. WHITE & CO....</h2> + +<h2>14 BEDFORD STREET, STRAND, W.C. 1897</h2> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[Pg v]</a></span></p><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[Pg iv]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align='center'><b>PROLOGUE</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'></td><td align='center'>PAGE</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>HIS HIGHNESS THE MUMMY</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>A PHYSIOLOGICAL EXPERIMENT</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_16">16</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER I</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>BACK THROUGH THE SHADOWS</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_32">32</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER II</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>BROTHERS OF THE BLOOD</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_47">47</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER III</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>IN THE HALL OF GOLD</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_66">66</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER IV</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>THE SISTER STARS</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_86">86</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER V</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>HOW DJAMA DID HIS WORK</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_105">105</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER VI</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>THE WAKING OF GOLDEN STAR</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_124">124</a><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[Pg vi]</a></span></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER VII</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>IN THE THRONE-ROOM OF YUPANQUI</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_145">145</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER VIII</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>HOW THE SOUL OF GOLDEN STAR CAME BACK</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_168">168</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER IX</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>THE TREACHERY OF DJAMA</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_188">188</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER X</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>ON THE RODADERO</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_209">209</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER XI</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>HOW WE TOOK THE CITY OF THE SUN</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_230">230</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER XII</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>QUEEN AND CROWN</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_250">250</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER XIII</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>HOW DJAMA PAID HIS DEBT</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_262">262</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='center'><b>CHAPTER XIV</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>THE RE-KINDLING OF THE SACRED FIRE</td><td align='center'><a href="#Page_271">271</a></td></tr> +</table></div> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii">[Pg vii]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h2> + +<h4>BY</h4> + +<h3>ALFRED PEARSE</h3> + + + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='right'>PAGE</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>'HAIL, SON OF THE SUN!'</td><td align='right'><i><a href="#Illustration_Hail_Son_of_the_Sun">Frontispiece</a></i></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>'AM I ONLY DREAMING THAT THE DEATH-SLEEP IS OVER?'</td><td align='right'><a href="#Illustration_Am_I_only_dreaming">26</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>THE DAGGER-POINT DROPPED TILL IT WAS WITHIN AN INCH OF GOLDEN STAR'S BREAST</td><td align='right'><a href="#The_dagger-point_dropped_till_it_was_within_an_inch_of_Golden_Stars_breast">119</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>THEY THRUST HIM IN WITH HIS ARMS STILL BOUND</td><td align='right'><a href="#They_thrust_him_in_with_his_arms_still_bound">205</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>IT HAD SMITTEN HIM TO THE HEART</td><td align='right'><a href="#Illustration_It_had_smitten_him_to_the_heart">228</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>NOW THE MOMENT FOR THE GIVING OF THE SIGN HAD COME</td><td align='right'><a href="#Illustration_Now_the_moment_for_the_giving">280</a></td></tr> +</table></div> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h1>The Romance of Golden Star</h1> + + + + +<h2>PROLOGUE</h2> + + +<h3>I</h3> + +<h3>HIS HIGHNESS THE MUMMY</h3> + + +<p>'Ah, what a thing it would be for us if his Inca +Highness were really only asleep, as he looks to +be! Just think what he could tell us—how easily +he could re-create that lost wonderland of his for +us, what riddles he could answer, what lies he could +contradict. And then think of all the lost treasures +that he could show us the way to. Upon my word, +if Mephistopheles were to walk into this room just +now, I think I should be tempted to make a bargain +with him. Do you know, Djama, I believe I would +give half the remainder of my own life, whatever +that may be, to learn the secrets that were once +locked up in that withered, desiccated brain of his.'</p> + +<p>The speaker was one of two men who were +standing in a large room, half-study, half-museum,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span> +in a big, old-fashioned house in Maida Vale. +Wherever the science of archæology was studied, +Professor Martin Lamson was known as the +highest living authority on the subject of the +antiquities of South America. He had just returned +from a year's relic-hunting in Peru and +Bolivia, and was enjoying the luxury of unpacking +his treasures with the almost boyish delight +which, under such circumstances, comes only to the +true enthusiast. His companion was a somewhat +slenderly-built man, of medium height, whose clear, +olive skin, straight, black hair, and deep blue-black +eyes betrayed a not very remote Eastern origin.</p> + +<p>Dr Laurens Djama was a physiologist, whose +rapidly-acquired fame—he was barely thirty-two—would +have been considered sounder by his +professional brethren if it had not been, as they +thought, impaired by excursions into by-ways of +science which were believed to lead him perilously +near to the borders of occultism. Five years before +he had pulled the professor through a very bad +attack of the calentura in Panama, where they +met by the merest traveller's chance, and since +then they had been fast friends.</p> + +<p>They were standing over a long packing-case, +some seven feet in length and two and a-half in +breadth, in which lay, at full length, wrapped in +grave-clothes that had once been gaily coloured, +but which were now faded and grey with the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span> +grave-dust, the figure of a man with hands crossed +over the breast, dead to all appearances, and yet +so gruesomely lifelike that it seemed hard to believe +that the broad, muscular chest over which +the crossed hands lay was not actually heaving +and falling with the breath of life.</p> + +<p>The face had been uncovered. It was that of +a man still in the early prime of life. The dull +brown hair was long and thick, the features somewhat +aquiline, and stamped even in death with an +almost royal dignity. The skin was of a pale +bronze, though darkened by the hues of death. +Yet every detail of the face was so perfect and so +life-like that, as the professor had said, it seemed +to be rather the face of a man in a deep sleep +than that of an Inca prince who must have been +dead and buried for over three hundred years. +The closed eyes, though somewhat sunken in +their sockets, were the eyes of sleep rather than +of death, and the lids seemed to lie so lightly +over them that it looked as though one awakening +touch would raise them.</p> + +<p>'It is beyond all question the most perfect +specimen of a mummy that I have seen,' said +the doctor, stooping down and drawing his thin, +nervous fingers very lightly over the dried skin +of the right cheek. 'On my honour, I simply +can't believe that His Highness, as you call him, +ever really went to the other world by any of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span> +orthodox routes. If you could imagine an absolute +suspension of all the vital functions induced by the +influence of something—some drug or hypnotic +process unknown to modern science, brought into +action on a human being in the very prime of his +vital strength—then, so far as I can see, the results +of that influence would be exactly what you see +here.'</p> + +<p>'But surely that can't be anything but a dream. +How could it be possible to bring all the vital +functions to a dead stop like that, and yet keep +them in such a state that it might be possible—for +that's what I suppose you are driving at—to +start them into activity again, just as one might +wind up a clock that had been stopped for a few +weeks and set it going?'</p> + +<p>'My dear fellow, the borderland between life +and death is so utterly unknown to the very best +of us that there is no telling what frightful possibilities +there may be lying hidden under the +shadows that hang over it. You know as well as +I do that there are perfectly well authenticated +instances on record of Hindoo Fakirs who have +allowed themselves to be placed in a state of +suspended animation and had their tongues turned +back into their throats, their mouths and noses +covered with clay, and have been buried in graves +that have been filled up and had sentries watching +day and night over them for as long a period as<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span> +six weeks, and then have been dug up and restored +to perfect health and strength again in a few hours. +Now, if life can be suspended for six weeks and +then restored to an organism which, from all +physiological standpoints, must be regarded as +inanimate, why not for six years or six hundred +years, for the matter of that? Given once the +possibility, which we may assume as proved, of a +restoration to life after total suspension of animation, +then it only becomes a question of preservation +of tissue for more or less indefinite periods. +Granted that tissue can be so preserved, then, +given the other possibility already proved, and—well, +we will talk about the other possibility +afterwards. Now, tell me, don't you, as an +archæologist, see anything peculiar about this +Inca prince of yours?'</p> + +<p>The professor had been looking keenly at his +friend during the delivery of this curious physiological +lecture. He seemed as though he were +trying to read the thoughts that were chasing +each other through his brain behind the impenetrable +mask of that smooth, broad forehead +of his. He looked into his eyes, but saw nothing +there save a cold, steady light that he had often +seen before when the doctor was discussing +subjects that interested him deeply. As for his +face, it was utterly impassive—the face of a +dispassionate scientist quietly discussing the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span> +possible solution of a problem that had been +laid before him. Whether his friend was really +driving at some unheard-of and unearthly solution +of the problem which he himself had raised, +or whether he was merely discussing the possible +issue of some abstract question in physiology, +he was utterly unable to discover, and so he +thought it best to confine himself to the matter +in hand, without hazarding any risky guesses +that might possibly result in his own confusion. +So he answered as quietly as he could:</p> + +<p>'Yes, I must confess that there are two perhaps +very important points of difference between this +and any other Peruvian mummy that I have +ever seen or heard of.'</p> + +<p>'Ah, I thought so,' said Djama, half closing +his eyes and allowing just the ghost of a smile +to flit across his lips. 'I thought I knew enough +about archæology and the science of mummies +in general to expect you to say that. Now, just +for the gratification of my own vanity, I should +like to try and anticipate what you are going +to say; and if I'm wrong, well, of course, I shall +only be too happy to be contradicted.'</p> + +<p>'Very well,' laughed the professor; 'say on!'</p> + +<p>'Well, in the first place, I believe I'm right +in saying that all Peruvian mummies that have +so far been discovered have been found in a +sitting posture, with the legs drawn close up to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span> +the body by means of bindings and burial-clothes, +so that the chin rested between the knees, while +the arms were brought round the legs and folded +over them. Then, again, these mummies have +always been found in an upright position, while +you found this one lying down.'</p> + +<p>'Quite so, quite so!' said the professor. 'In +fact, I may say that no one save myself has +ever discovered such a mummy as this among +all the thousands that have been taken out of +Peruvian burying-places. And now, what is +your other point?'</p> + +<p>'Simply this,' said Djama, kneeling down +beside the case, and laying his hands over the +abdomen of the recumbent figure. 'In the case +of all mummies, whether Egyptian or Peruvian, +it was the invariable practice of the embalmers +to take out the intestines and fill the abdominal +cavity with preservative herbs and spices. Now, +this has not been done in this case. Look here.'</p> + +<p>And deftly and swiftly he moved the dusty, +half-decayed coverings from the body of the +mummy, while the professor looked on half-wondering +and half-frightened for the safety of +his treasure.</p> + +<p>'That has not been done here. You see the +man's body is as perfect as it was on the day +he died—to use a conventional term. Now, am +I not right?'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span></p> + +<p>'Yes, yes; perfectly right,' answered the professor, +who felt himself fast losing his grip of +the conversation which had taken so strange a +turn. 'But what has all this got to do with +the most unique mummy that ever was brought +from South America? Surely, in the name of +all that's sacred, you don't mean—'</p> + +<p>'My dear fellow, never mind what I mean for +the present,' replied Djama, with another of his +half smiles. 'If I mean anything at all, the meaning +will keep, and if I don't it doesn't matter. +Now, do you mind telling me exactly how and +where you came across this extraordinary specimen +of—well, for want of a better term—we will +say, Inca embalming?'</p> + +<p>'Yes, willingly,' said the professor, glad to +get back again on to the familiar ground of his +own experiences. 'I found it almost by accident +in a little valley about four days' ride to the +westward of Cuzco. I was on my way to +Abancay across the Apurimac. My mule had +fallen lame, and so I got belated. Night came +on, and somehow we got off the track crossing +one of the Punas—those elevated tablelands, you +know, up among the mountains—and when the +mule could go no farther we camped, and the +next morning I found myself in an almost +circular valley, completely walled in by enormous +mountains, save for the narrow, crooked gorge<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> +through which we had stumbled by the purest +accident. The bottom of this valley was filled +by a little lake, and while I was exploring the +shores of this I saw, hidden underneath an overhanging +ledge of rock, a couple of courses of that +wonderful mortarless masonry which the Incas +alone seemed to know how to build. I had +no sooner seen it than all desire of getting to +Abancay or anywhere else had left me. I made +my arriero turn the animals loose for the day, +and then I sent him back to a village we had +passed through the day before to buy more +provisions and bring them to me.</p> + +<p>'As soon as he had got out of sight I set to +work to get some of the stones out and see what +there was behind them. I knew there must be +something, for the Incas never wasted labour. It +was hard work, for the stones were fitted together +as perfectly as the pieces of a Chinese puzzle; but +at last I got one out and then the rest was easy. +Behind the stones I found a little chamber hollowed +out of the rock, perfectly clean and dry, and on the +floor of this I found, without any other covering +than what you see there, the mummy of His Highness +lying on what had once been a bed of soft +Vicuña skins, as perfect and as lifelike as though +he had only crept in there twelve hours before, +and had laid down for a good night's rest.</p> + +<p>'You may imagine how delighted I was at such<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span> +a find. I hardly knew how to contain myself +until my man came back. I put the stones back +into their places as well as I could, and when +Patricio returned the next day I had the animals +saddled up, and started off in a hurry to Cuzco. +There I had this case made, bought two extra +mules, brought them to the valley, packed up +my mummy, took it back to Cuzco, and from +there to the railway terminus at Sicuani and +took it down by train to Arequipa, where I left +it in safe keeping until I had finished the rest of +my exploration. Then I went back, took it +down to Mollendo, got it on board the steamer, +and here it is.'</p> + +<p>'And you didn't find any traces of other treasure-places, +I suppose, in the valley?' said Djama, who +had listened with the most perfect attention to +the professor's story.</p> + +<p>'No, I didn't, though I must confess that one +side of the cave in which I found this was walled +up with the same kind of masonry as there was +in front of it; but, to tell you the truth, the +Peruvian Government has such insane ideas about +treasure-hunting; and the life of a man who is +believed to have discovered anything worth stealing +is worth so little in the wilder districts of the +interior, that I was afraid of losing the treasure +I had got, perhaps for the sake of a few little +gold ornaments which I might have dug out of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span> +the hill, and so I decided to be content with what +I'd found.'</p> + +<p>'H'm!' said the doctor. 'Well, you may have +been wise under the circumstances; I daresay you +were. But we can see about that afterwards. +Meanwhile there is something else to be talked +about.'</p> + +<p>He stopped suddenly, took a quick turn or two +up and down the room, with his hands clasped +behind him and his eyes fixed on the floor. Then +he went to the door, opened it, looked out, shut +it and locked it, and then came back again and +sat down without a word in his chair, staring +steadily at the impassive face of the mummy in +the packing-case.</p> + +<p>'Why, what's the matter, doctor?' said the +professor, a trifle sharply. 'You don't suppose I +am afraid of anyone coming to steal my treasure, +do you?'</p> + +<p>'My dear fellow,' said Djama, looking him +straight in the eyes, and speaking very slowly, +as though his mind was doing something else +besides shaping the thoughts to which he was +giving utterance, 'I don't for a moment suppose +that there are thieves about, or that, if there were, +any burglar with a competent knowledge of his +profession would think of stealing your mummy, +priceless as it may prove to be. I locked +the door because I don't want to be interrupted.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span> +I want to talk to you about a very important +matter.'</p> + +<p>'And that is?'</p> + +<p>'Mephistopheles.'</p> + +<p>'<span class="smcap">What</span>?'</p> + +<p>'Gently, my friend, gently, don't get excited +yet. You will want all your nerves soon, I can +assure you. Yes, I am quite serious. You know +that in the good old days, when people still believed +in His Majesty of Darkness, such a speech +as the one you remember making a short time ago +was quite enough to call up one of his agents, +armed with full powers to make contracts and +do all necessary business.'</p> + +<p>'Look here, Laurens, if you go on talking like +that, I shall begin to think you have gone out of +your mind.'</p> + +<p>'My dear fellow, to be quite candid with you, +I don't care two pins what you think on that subject. +I have been called mad too many times for +that. Now, suppose, just for argument's sake, +that I were Mephistopheles, and staked my +diabolic reputation on the statement that in that +thing you possess a possible key to those lost +treasures of the Incas, which ten generations of +men have hunted for in vain, what kind of a +bargain would you be inclined to make with me +on the strength of it? Half the rest of your life, +I think you said, and as that wouldn't be very<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> +much good to me, suppose we say the half of +any treasures we may discover by the help of our +silent friend there? Eh?—will that suit you?'</p> + +<p>'Are you really serious, Djama, or are you only +dreaming another of these wild scientific dreams +of yours?' exclaimed the professor, taking a couple +of quick strides towards him. 'What connection +can there possibly be between a mummy, about +four centuries years old, and the lost treasures of +the Incas?'</p> + +<p>'This man was an Inca, wasn't he?' said the +doctor, abruptly, 'and one of the highest rank, too, +from what you have said. He lived just about +the time of the Conquest, didn't he—the time +when the priests stripped their temples, and the +nobles emptied their palaces of their treasures to +save them from the Spaniards? Is it not likely +that he would know where, at anyrate, a great part +of them was buried? Nay, may he not even have +known the localities of the lost mines that the +Incas got their hundredweights of gold from, and +of the emerald mines which no one has ever been +able to find? Why, Lamson, if these dead lips +could speak, I believe they could make you and +me millionaires in an hour. And why shouldn't +they speak?'</p> + +<p>'Don't talk like that, Djama, for Heaven's sake! +It is too serious a thing to joke about,' said the +professor, with a half-frightened glance in his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> +set and shining eyes. 'I should have thought +you, of all men, knew enough of the facts of life +and death not to talk such nonsense as that.'</p> + +<p>'Nonsense!' said the physiologist, interrupting +him almost angrily; 'may I not know enough of +the facts of life and death, as you call them, to +know that that is <i>not</i> nonsense? But there, it's +no use arguing about things like this. Will you +allow this mummy of yours to be made the +subject of—well, we will say, an experiment in +physiology?'</p> + +<p>'What! the finest and most unique huaca that +was ever brought to Europe—'</p> + +<p>'It would only be made finer still by the experiment, +even if it failed. I know what you are +going to say, and I will give you my word of +honour, and, if you like, I'll pledge you my +professional reputation, that not a hair of its +head shall be injured. Let me take it to my +laboratory, and I promise you solemnly that in a +week you shall have it back, not as it is now, but +either the body of your Inca, as perfect as it was +the day he died, or—'</p> + +<p>He stopped, and looked hard at his friend, as +if wondering what the effects of his next words +would be upon him.</p> + +<p>'Or what?' asked the professor, almost in a +whisper.</p> + +<p>'Your Inca prince, roused from his three-<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span>hundred-year +sleep, and able to answer your +questions and guide us to his lost mines and +treasure houses.'</p> + +<p>'Are you in earnest, Djama?' the professor +whispered, catching him by the arm and looking +round at the mummy as though he half thought +that the silent witness in the packing-case might +be listening to the words which, if it could have +heard, would have had such a terrible significance +for it. 'Do you really mean to say in sober +earnest that there is the remotest chance of your +science being able to work such a miracle as that?'</p> + +<p>'A chance, yes,' replied Djama, steadily. 'It is +not a certainty, of course, but I believe it to be +possible. Will you let me try?'</p> + +<p>'Yes, you shall try,' answered the professor in a +voice nothing like as steady as his. 'If any other +man but you had even hinted at such a thing, +I would have seen him—well, in a lunatic asylum +first. But there, I will trust my Inca to you. It +seems a fearful thing even to attempt, and yet, +after all, if it fails there will be no harm done, and +if it succeeds—ah, yes, if it succeeds—it will +mean—'</p> + +<p>'Endless fame for you, my friend, as the recreator +of a lost society, and for both of us wealth, +perhaps beyond counting. But stop a moment—granted +success, how shall we talk with our Inca +<i>revenant</i>? Have I not heard you say that the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span> +Aymaru dialect of the Quichua tongue is lost as +completely as the Inca treasures?'</p> + +<p>'Not quite, though I believe I am now the only +white man on earth who understands it.'</p> + +<p>'Good! then let me get to work at once, and in +a week—well, in a week we shall see.'</p> + + +<h3>II</h3> + +<h3>A PHYSIOLOGICAL EXPERIMENT</h3> + +<p>Laurens Djama dined with the professor that +night, and the small hours were growing large +before they ended the long talk of which their +strange bargain, and the still stranger experiment +which was to result from it, formed the subject. +The next day the packing-case containing the +mummy was transferred to Djama's laboratory, +and then for a whole week neither the professor +nor any of his friends or acquaintances had either +sight or speech of him.</p> + +<p>Every caller at his house in Brondesbury Park +was politely but firmly denied admittance on professional +grounds, and three letters and two telegrams +which the professor had sent to him, after being +himself denied admittance, remained unanswered.</p> + +<p>At last, on the Thursday following the Friday +on which the mummy had been sent to the +laboratory, the professor received a telegram<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> +telling him to come at once to the doctor. Three +minutes after he had read it he was in a hansom +and on his way to Kilburn, wondering what it +was that he was to be brought face to face with +during the next half hour.</p> + +<p>This time there was no denial. The door +opened as he went up the steps, and the servant +handed him a note. He tore it open and read,—</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>'<i>Come round to the laboratory and make a new +acquaintance who will yet be an old one.</i>'</p></div> + +<p>His heart stood still, and he caught his breath +sharply as he read the words which told him that +the unearthly experiment for which he had furnished +the subject had been successful.</p> + +<p>The doctor's laboratory stood apart from the +house in the long, narrow garden at the back, and +as he approached the door he stopped for a +moment, and an almost irresistible impulse to +go away and have nothing more to do with the +unholy work in hand took possession of him. +Then the love of his science and the longing to +hear the marvels which could only be heard from +the lips that had been silent for centuries overcame +his fears, and he went up to the door +and knocked softly.</p> + +<p>It was opened by a haggard, wild-eyed man, +whom he scarcely recognised as his old friend.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> +Djama did not speak; he simply caught hold of +the sleeve of his coat with a nervous, trembling +grasp, drew him in, shut the door, and led him +to a corner of the room where there was a little +camp bed, curtained all round with thin, transparent +muslin, through which he could see the +shape of a man lying under the sheets.</p> + +<p>Djama pulled the curtain aside, and said in a +hoarse whisper,—</p> + +<p>'Look, it has been hard work, and terrible +work, too, but I have succeeded. Do you see, he +is breathing!'</p> + +<p>The professor stared wide-eyed at the white +pillow on which lay the head of what, a week +before, had been his mummy. Now it was the +head of a living man; the pale bronze of the skin +was clear and moist with the dew of life; the lips +were no longer brown and dry, but faintly red and +slightly parted, and the counterpane, which was +pulled close up under the chin, was slowly rising +and falling with the regular rhythm of a sleeper's +breathing. He looked from the face of him who +had been dead and was alive again to the face of +the man whose daring science and perfect skill +had wrought the unholy miracle, and then he +shrank back from the bedside, pulling Djama +with him, and whispering,—</p> + +<p>'Good God, it is even more awful than it is +wonderful! How did you do it?'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span></p> + +<p>'That is my secret,' whispered Djama, his dry +lips shaping themselves into a ghastly smile, 'and +for all the treasures that that man ever saw, I +wouldn't tell it to a living soul, or do such hideous +work again. I tell you I have seen life and death +fighting together for two days and nights in this +room—not, mind you, as they fight on a deathbed, +but the other way, and I would rather see a +thousand men die than one more come back out, +of death into life. You see, he is sleeping now. +He opened his eyes just before daybreak this +morning—that's nearly ten hours ago—but if I +lived ten thousand years I should never forget that +one look he gave me before he shut them again. +Since then he has slept, and I stood by that +bed testing his pulse and his breathing for eight +hours before I wired you. Then I knew he +would live, and so I sent for you.'</p> + +<p>The professor looked at his friend with an +involuntary and unconquerable aversion rising in +his heart against him; an aversion that was half +fear, half horror, and then he remembered that he +himself had a share in the fearful work which had +been done—a work that could not now be undone +without murder.</p> + +<p>With another backward look at the bed, he +said, in a whisper that was almost a smothered +groan,—</p> + +<p>'When will he wake?'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span></p> + +<p>Before Djama could reply, the question was +answered by a faint rustle, and a low, long-drawn +sigh from the bed. They looked and +saw the Inca's face turned towards them, and +two fever-bright eyes shining through the curtains.</p> + +<p>'He is awake already, two hours sooner than +I expected,' said Djama, in a voice that he +strove vainly to keep steady. 'Come, now, you +are the only man on earth who can talk to +him. Let us see if he has come back to +reason as well as to life.'</p> + +<p>'Yes, I will try,' said the professor, faintly. +He took a couple of trembling steps. Then +the lights in the room began to dance, the +whitewashed walls reeled round him, and he +pitched forward and fell unconscious by the +side of the bed.</p> + +<p>When he came to himself he was lying on +the floor of the laboratory, out of sight of the +bed, behind a great cupboard, glass-doored and +filled with bottles. Djama was kneeling beside +him. A strong smell of ammonia dominated +the other smells peculiar to a laboratory, and +his brow was wet with the spirit that Djama +was gently rubbing on it with his hand.</p> + +<p>'What have I been doing?' he said, as, with +the other's assistance, he got up into a sitting +position and looked stupidly about him. 'It +isn't true, that is it, I really saw—Good God<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> +no, it can't be; it's too horrible. I must have +dreamt it.'</p> + +<p>'Nonsense, my dear fellow, nonsense! I should +have thought you would have had better nerves +than that. Come, take a nip of this, and pull +yourself together. There is nothing so very +horrible about it for you. Now, if you had had +the actual work to do—'</p> + +<p>'Then it <i>is</i> true! You really have brought +him back to life again? That was him I +saw lying on the bed?' He looked up at +Djama as he spoke with a half-inquiring, half-frightened +glance. His voice was weak and +unsteady, like the voice of a man who has been +stunned by some terrible shock, and is still +dazed with the fear and wonder of it.</p> + +<p>'Yes, of course it was,' said Djama; 'but I +can tell you, I should have hesitated before I +introduced you so suddenly, if I hadn't thought +that the nerves of an old traveller like you +would have been a good deal stronger than +they seem to be. It's a very good job that +His Highness was only about half conscious +himself when you collapsed, or you might have +given him a shock that would have killed him +again.'</p> + +<p>'Again?' said the professor, echoing the last +word as he got up slowly to his feet. 'That +sounds queer, doesn't it, to talk of killing a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> +man <i>again</i>? I am more sorry than I can say +that I was weak enough to let my feelings +overcome me in such a ridiculous fashion. However, +I am all right now. Give me another +drain of that brandy of yours, and then let us +talk. Is he still awake?'</p> + +<p>'No, he dozed off again almost immediately, +and you have been here about ten minutes or +a quarter of an hour. Do you think you can +stand another look at him?'</p> + +<p>'Oh, certainly,' said the professor, who, as a +matter of fact, felt a trifle ashamed of himself +and his weakness, and was anxious to do +something that would restore his credit. He +followed the doctor out into the laboratory +again, and stood with him for some moments +without speaking by the Inca's bedside. He +was sleeping very quietly, and his breathing +seemed to be stronger and deeper than it had +been. He had slightly shifted his position, and +was lying now half turned on his right side, +with his right cheek on the pillow.</p> + +<p>'You see he has moved,' whispered Djama. +'That shows that muscular control has been +re-established. We shall have him walking +about in a day or so. Ah! he is dreaming, +and of something pleasant, too. Look at his +lips moving into a smile. Poor fellow, just +fancy a man dreaming of things that happened<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> +three hundred years ago, and waking up to +find himself in another world. I'll be bound +he is dreaming about his wife or sweetheart, +and we shall have to tell him, or rather you +will, that she has been a mummy for three +centuries. Look now, his lips are moving; I +believe he is going to say something. See if +you can hear what it is?'</p> + +<p>The professor stooped down and held his ear +so close that he could feel on his cheek the +gentle fanning of the breath that had been +still for three centuries. Then the Inca's lips +moved again, and a soft sighing sound came +from them, and in the midst of it he caught +the words,—</p> + +<p>'<i>Cori-Coyllur, Nustallipa, Ñusta mi!</i>'</p> + +<p>Then there came a long, gentle sigh. The +Inca's lips became still again, shaped into +a very sweet and almost womanly smile, as +though his vision had passed and left him in +a happy, dreamless slumber.</p> + +<p>'What did he say?' whispered Djama. 'Were +you able to understand it?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' said the professor, 'yes, and you were +right about the subject of his dream. Come away, +in case we wake him, and I will tell you.'</p> + +<p>They went to the other end of the laboratory, +and the professor went on, still speaking in a low, +half-whisper,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Poor fellow, I am afraid we have incurred a +terribly heavy debt to him. What he said meant, +"Golden Star, my princess, my darling!" So you +see you were right, but poor Golden Star has been +dead three hundred years and more—that is, at +least, if his Golden Star is the same as the heroine +of the tradition.'</p> + +<p>'What tradition?' asked Djama.</p> + +<p>'It's too long a story to tell you now, but if she +is the same, then our Inca's name is Vilcaroya, +and he is the hero of the strangest story, and, +thanks to you, the strangest fate that the wildest +romancer could imagine. However, the story +must keep, for I wouldn't spoil it by cutting it +short. The principal question now is—what are +we going to do with him? We can't keep him +here, of course?'</p> + +<p>'No, certainly not,' replied Djama, with knitted +brows and faintly smiling lips. 'His Highness +must be cared for in accordance with his rank and +our expectations. I shall have him taken into the +house and properly nursed.'</p> + +<p>'But what about your sister? You will frighten +her to death if you take in a living patient that +has been dead for three hundred years.'</p> + +<p>'Not if we manage it properly; there will be no +need to tell Ruth the story yet, at anyrate. I'll +tell her that I am going to receive a patient who +is suffering from a mysterious disease unknown<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> +to medical science. I'll say I picked him up in +the Oriental Home in Whitechapel, and have +brought him here to study him, and you and +I must smuggle him into the house and put +him to bed some time when she is out of the way. +Then I'll instal her as nurse; in fact, she will do +that for herself; and as there is no chance of her +learning anything from him, we can break the +truth to her by degrees, and when His Highness +is well enough to travel we'll all be off to Peru +and come back millionaires, if you can only persuade +him to tell you the secret of his treasure-houses.'</p> + +<p>That night the doctor and the professor took +turns in watching by the bedside of their strange +patient, whose slumber became lighter and lighter +until, towards midnight, he got so restless and +apparently uneasy that Djama considered that +the time had come to wake him and see if he +was able to take any nourishment. So he set +the professor to work, warming some chicken +broth over a spirit lamp, and mixing a little +champagne and soda-water in one glass and +brandy and water in another. Meanwhile, he +filled a hypodermic syringe with colourless fluid +out of a little stoppered bottle, and then turned +the sheet down and injected the contents of the +syringe under the smooth, bronze skin of the +Inca's shoulder. He moved slightly at the prick<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> +of the needle, then he drew two or three deep +breaths, and suddenly sat up in bed and stared +about him with wide open eyes, full, as they well +might be, of inquiring wonder.</p> + +<p>The professor, who had turned at the sound of +the hurried breathing, saw him as he raised himself, +and heard him say in the clear and somewhat +high-pitched tone of a dweller among the +mountains,—</p> + +<p>'Has the morning dawned again for the +Children of the Sun? Am I truly awake, or +am I only dreaming that the death-sleep is over? +Where is Golden Star, and where am I? Tell +me—you who have doubtless brought me back to +the life we forsook together—was it last night +or how many nights or moons ago?'</p> + +<p>The words came slowly at first, like those of +a man still on the borderland between sleep and +waking; but each one was spoken more clearly +and decisively than the one before it, and the last +sentence was uttered in the strong, steady tones +of a man in full possession of his faculties.</p> + +<p>'Come here, Lamson,' said Djama, a trifle +nervously; 'bring the soup with you, and some +brandy, though I don't think he needs it. Do +you understand what he said?'</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 392px;"> +<a name="Illustration_Am_I_only_dreaming" id="Illustration_Am_I_only_dreaming"><img src="images/illus2.jpg" width="392" height="600" alt=""Am I only dreaming that the death-sleep is over?" " title=""Am I only dreaming that the death-sleep is over?" " /> +<span class="caption">"Am I only dreaming that the death-sleep is over?" </span> +</a></div> + +<p>'Yes,' replied the professor, coming to the bedside +with a cup of soup in one hand and a glass +of brandy and water in the ether. Both hands<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span> +trembled as he set the cup and the glass down on +a little table. He looked at the Inca like a man +looking at a re-embodied spirit, and said to him +in Quichua,—</p> + +<p>'I am not he who has brought you back to life, +but my friend here, who is a great and skilled +physician, and master of the arts of life and death. +You are in his house, and safe, for we are friends, +and have nursed you back to health and waking +life after your long sleep.'</p> + +<p>'But Golden Star,' said the Inca, interrupting +him with a flash of impatience in his eyes. +'Where is she—my bride who went with me +into the shades of death? Have you not brought +her, too, back to life?'</p> + +<p>The professor stared in silence at the strange +speaker of these strange words, which told him +so plainly that the old legend of the death-bridal +of Vilcaroya-Inca and Golden Star was now no +legend at all, but a true story which had come +down almost unchanged from generation to +generation. Then an infinite pity filled his +heart for this lonely wanderer from another +age, whose friends and kindred had been dead +for centuries, and whose very nation was now +only a shadowy name on a half-forgotten page +of history.</p> + +<p>'What does he say?' said Djama, breaking in +upon his reverie. 'I suppose he wants to know<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> +where he is, and what has become of that sweetheart +of his he was dreaming about?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' replied the professor; 'but you won't +understand properly until I have told you the +story. Poor fellow! I suppose we shall have to +tell him the ghastly truth. Good Heavens! fancy +telling a man that his wife has been dead for +three hundred years or more! Look here, Djama, +this business can't stop here, you know. What +a fool I was, after all, not to see if there wasn't +another chamber beside the one I found him in! +Of course there must be, and I have no doubt she +is lying there at this present moment. We shall +have to go and find her, and you must restore +her as you have done him. Phew! where is it +all going to end, I wonder!'</p> + +<p>'And suppose we can't find her, or suppose I +fail, even if I can bring myself to undertake that +horrible work all over again?' said Djama, looking +almost fearfully at the Inca, who was still sitting +up in the bed glancing mutely from one to the +other, as though waiting for an answer to his +question. Then, keeping his voice as steady as +he could, the professor told him the story of his +resuscitation, addressing him by his own name +and ending by asking him if he remembered +when he and Golden Star had devoted themselves +to die together, as the tradition said they +had done.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span></p> + +<p>'Yes, I remember!' said Vilcaroya, with +brightening eyes and faintly flushing cheeks. +'How could I forget it? It was when the +bearded strangers from the north had come +and taken the usurper Atahuallpa prisoner in +the midst of his conquering host at Cajamarca. +It was after the Inca Huascar had been slain +by stealth with a traitor's knife. It was on the +night of the feast of Raymi, when our Father the +Sun had left the Sacred Fleece unkindled, and +when was fulfilled the prophecy that the night +should fall over the land of the Children of the +Sun. Now, tell me, you who speak the language +of my people, how long have I been sleeping?'</p> + +<p>Instead of replying directly, he offered the Inca +the cup of broth, and asked him first to take the +nourishment that he must need so greatly after +his long fast, telling him that it was needful to +prevent him losing his new-found strength again. +When he had eaten and drunk a little, then he +would tell him what he could.</p> + +<p>He took the broth and a little bread obediently, +and while he was eating and drinking, the professor +translated what he had said to the doctor. +When he had finished, Djama looked at the Inca, +sitting there taking food and drink like any other +human being, and with evident relish, too, and +said,—</p> + +<p>'That happened in 1532—three hundred and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span> +sixty-five years ago! It sounds utterly incredible, +doesn't it, and yet there he is, eating and drinking +and talking with us just like any other man. I +can hardly believe the work of my own hands, +and I am beginning to half wish I had never +begun it. Just imagine the awful loneliness to +which we shall have condemned this poor fellow, +supposing we can't find his Golden Star and restore +her to him! Still perhaps you had better +tell him the truth at once. I think he can stand +it. He has been a long time coming round, but +I don't think there is much the matter with him +now.'</p> + +<p>Then the professor told Vilcaroya the, to him, +so terrible truth, that of all men in the world he +was the most lonely, separated as he was from +all that he had known and loved by an impassable +gulf of nearly four long centuries—that his well-loved +Golden Star was but a memory known to +few, a name in a vague tradition; that the resting-place, +even of her mummy, was unknown, and +that all that the darkest prophecy could have +foretold had in very truth fallen upon the land +of the Incas and the Children of the Sun.</p> + +<p>Vilcaroya heard him to the end in silence; then, +raising his hands to his forehead, he bowed his +head and said,—</p> + +<p>'It is the will of our Father, foretold by the +lips of his priests, but other things were foretold<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span> +which shall be fulfilled as well as these. Golden +Star is not dead; she only sleeps as I did. If I +have awakened, why shall not she? I know where +she lies—where Anda-Huillac swore to me they +would lay her. Come, let us go! I will take you +to the place, and you shall restore her to me, warm +and living and loving as she was when I kissed +her good-bye in the Sanctuary of the Sun, and +I will give you treasures of gold and silver and +jewels such as you have never dreamed of in +exchange for her.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h2>THE STORY OF VILCAROYA</h2> + +<h3>CHAPTER I</h3> + +<h3>BACK THROUGH THE SHADOWS</h3> + + +<p>As the time passes between dreaming and waking, +so for me did the long years pass, flowing like a +smooth and silent stream seen from afar, out of +the darkness that fell so slowly and so sweetly over +my eyes that night when I sank into the death-trance +beside Golden Star, my beloved, in the +bridal chamber that they made for us in the +Temple of the Sun, into the light that shone +into them when they opened upon a scene so +different, and saw a white, haggard face bending +over me, and two black, burning eyes looking +into them.</p> + +<p>Then I closed them again and slept, and when I +woke again there were two faces looking at me, +both white and full of fear and wonder, and I saw +two beings who seemed very strange to me, such +as I had never seen among the Children of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span> +Sun, standing by the couch on which I lay, and +one of them fell down as though sore stricken, +and I tried to think what this could mean, and, +thinking, fell asleep again.</p> + +<p>Then I dreamt a long, sweet dream of the days +that I now know were far past, when I, Vilcaroya, +son of the great Huayna-Capac, lived in the Land +of the Four Regions, a prince among princes, a +warrior and a child of the Sacred Race, whose +blood had flowed unmixed through many generations +from the divine fountain of life and light, our +Father the Sun. I dreamt of Golden Star, and the +days when I loved her in timid silence, for she was +the fairest of all our race, and so, as it seemed to +me, destined to no less a lot than the motherhood +of a long line of Incas, in whom should live and +grow to ever greater splendour the glories of the +race that owned no earthly origin.</p> + +<p>I called her in my dream, but she made no +answer. I saw her lying by my side in that well-remembered +chamber, with the shadowy forms of +the priests standing about us as I had seen them +long before; but, alas! she lay still with closed eyes +and lips which seemed to have forgotten how +sweetly they once could smile. I whispered her +name, mingled with many a loving word, into her +ear, and still she moved not. I put my arms about +her and kissed her, and instantly I shrank back +shivering with a fear unspeakable, for the form<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span> +that should have been so warm and soft and +yielding, was chilled and pulseless and rigid, as +though some foul magic had changed it into stone, +and the lips that should have given me back kiss +for kiss were still and cold and senseless.</p> + +<p>Then I saw, as it seemed with half-closed eyes, +that dear shape of hers being borne away from me, +while I, longing to snatch her from the hands of +those who were robbing me of her, yet lay helpless +on the couch, without strength to move or speak, +until all grew dim around me, and I felt myself +raised by invisible hands, and borne far away +through the darkness—and so my dream melted +away into the night of sleep.</p> + +<p>Then, yet again, I woke and saw the two strange +men that I had seen before, and one came and +spoke to me kindly in my own tongue, and called +me by my own name, and gave me food and drink, +and told me in a few, but to me terrible, words +that the dreams I had dreamed were dreams +indeed—dreams of a time that was long gone by, +of things that had passed away, perchance for +ever, and men and women whose names were only +memories.</p> + +<p>Thus did I come from the evening of one age +into the morning of another, falling asleep in the +prime of my strength and manhood, and waking +again even as I had fallen asleep—though those +who had closed my eyes had been dead for many<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> +generations, and the name of our ancient race was +but a bitter memory to the sons and daughters of +my own land amidst the mountains.</p> + +<p>Then I went forth into the wondrous new world +into which I had awakened, the world which you +who read this hold so common, and which I found +crowded with wonders so many and marvellous +that if it had not been for the loving care of her +who guided my first footsteps on my new journey, +as she might have guided those of a little child, +my re-awakening reason must soon have been +quenched in the night of madness.</p> + +<p>Many and strange as were the things that +happened to me during the first days and +months of my awakening, there is little need that +I should now write of them at any length. Yet +something I must say of them in order that the +still stranger things of which I shall have to tell +may be the better understood.</p> + +<p>And first I must tell of her whose gentle +hand led me from weakness to strength, and +guided my unwonted footsteps through the +mazes of that new wonderland in which I had +awakened, and from whose lips I learnt the +first words that I spoke of the strong and +stately English speech in which I am striving +so lamely and imperfectly to write down the +story of my new life.</p> + +<p>This was Ruth, the sister of Djama, whose<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span> +smile was the first ray of sunshine that shone +into my second life, and whose laugh was so +sweet and gladsome, that when it first sounded +in my ears, like an echo from the dear dead +past, I named her forthwith Cusi-Coyllur, which +in English means Joyful Star—after that royal +maiden of my own race who loved the handsome +rebel Ollantay, and, refusing all others, +waited for him in the House of the Virgins +of the Sun until he came in triumph to claim +her. She came with us to the south, rejecting +all contrary counsel and braving the labours of +the long, toilsome journey, so that she might be +the first woman to welcome Golden Star back +into the world of life.</p> + +<p>Yet what words can I find in this new speech +that I have yet but half learnt to tell fitly of +her beauty and sweet graciousness, and of all +the magic which made her seem in my eyes +like an angel that had come down from the +Mansions of the Sun to greet me in a world in +which I was a stranger? Better that you who +may read what I write should learn to know her +for yourself through the sweetness and grace of her +own words and deeds, as I shall strive, however +unworthily, to tell of them. So, then, let it be.</p> + +<p>But there is another of whom I must say +something before I go on to tell of my return +to my own land—now, alas! mine no longer—and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> +that is Francis Hartness, a captain among the +warriors of the English, and a friend of him who +was called the professor, because of his learning—he +who had helped Djama to bring me back +into the world of living men.</p> + +<p>He was a man of about thirty years, tall of +stature and strong of limb, brief of speech and +straight of tongue, with eyes as blue as the +skies which shine on Yucay, and hair and beard +golden and bright as the rays which flow from +the smile of our Father the Sun. Him we met +by chance one evening in the square of the town +which is called Panama, named, they told me, +after that older city, whence the conquerors of +my people sailed to ravish the realms of Huayna-Capac. +There was peace in his own land and +all the neighbouring countries, and so he was +journeying to the region which is now called +South America, where the descendants of the +Spaniards are nearly always fighting among +themselves over the spoils of my people, to see +what work he could find to keep his sword from +rusting.</p> + +<p>As he was greatly skilled in that strange, new +warfare of flame and thunder and far-smiting +bolts, which had but begun to be when our +Father the Sun hid his face from the eyes of +his children, I took counsel with Joyful Star—who +was ever my wisest as well as my most<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> +faithful guide in all things—and we together +told him my story as we went south, and after +that I had asked him if he would help me in +the task which I was going to essay, which was +nothing less than the taking back of the land +of my fathers, and the raising of the children +of my people to the ancient glories of that state +which I alone of living men remembered. To +this, after some shrewd questioning, he consented—for +it was a desperate venture, such as his brave +heart loved—and when he had given me his hand +on it, and promised, after the simple fashion of +his nation, to be true to me in peace and war, +I told him of the means that I could employ +to gain my end, and how I would use that lust +of gold which had led to the ruin of my people, +so that it should conquer the children of their +conquerors and give me back the empire that +had been my father's.</p> + +<p>At Panama we took ship again and travelled +swiftly and straightly south, driven by that +wondrous power which had come into the world +to serve men like a tireless giant since I had +fallen asleep; and day after day on the southward +voyage I walked alone up and down the deck, +or stood gazing, rapt in thought, at the desert +foreshore along which the steamer was running, +and at the great masses of the dark brown +barren mountains, as they towered range beyond<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> +range till they overtopped the clouds themselves +and stood serene and sharply outlined against +the blue background of the upper sky.</p> + +<p>Behind those mighty, rock-built ramparts lay +the well-loved, well-remembered land over which +my fathers had ruled in the days of peace, before +the stranger and the oppressor had come. On +the other side of them I knew that I was now +fated to find only the poor fragments of the +great cities and stately pleasure-houses that I +had known in all their strength and beauty—only +the silent and deserted ruins of the mighty +fortresses which had guarded the confines of +our lost empire, and were the portals through +which the Children of the Sun had marched +to unvarying conquest.</p> + +<p>I thought, too, of the broad, green, level plain +of Cajamarca, surrounded by its guardian ramparts +of terraced hills; of the long, verdant valley +of Cuzco with its hundred towns and villages +nestling amidst the foliage which shaded their +streets and squares, and looking out over the +level fields of the valley and the countless tiers +of terraces that rose green and gold with maize, +or glowing with flowers, to the summits of the +hills; and of that earthly paradise of Yucay, +wherein the Gardens of the Sun, the golden +shrines of my ancient faith, and the wondrous +pleasure-palaces of many generations of Incas had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> +glowed in almost heavenly beauty, embosomed in +green and gold and scarlet in the midst of inaccessible +mountains which themselves were overtopped +by the mighty peaks of eternal snow +that I had so often seen glimmering white and +ghostly in the moonlight, like guardian spirits +round an enchanted realm, on many a night of +delicious revelry now far past and lost in the +swift flood of the years that had rolled by since +then.</p> + +<p>It was to the poor remnants of all these glories +that I was returning—returning to find, as they +had told me, the homes of my ancestors laid waste +and the descendants of my people the slaves of +strangers. The desolation which it had taken +centuries to accomplish would be to me but +the swift, magical change of a day and a night +and a morning.</p> + +<p>Think, you who read, of the dread and the +horror of it! I had seen the last day of the stately +empire of my fathers the Incas! I had fallen +asleep and I had awakened, and now, on the +morrow of my sleep, I was coming back to the +silent and ghastly ruins which the slow, pitiless +work of the years and centuries had left behind it!</p> + +<p>But over the gulf of these same centuries the +hand of my Father the Sun was swiftly stretched +out to help and uphold me, for no sooner did I +again tread that soil which had once been sacred<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span> +to Him, than my fainting heart grew strong with +the memory of that ancient prophecy which I had +come to fulfil, and of which this new life of mine +was of itself a part fulfilment. If one part, and +that not the least, had already been made good, +then why not the rest?</p> + +<p>Far away behind those towering tiers of +mountains lay Golden Star in that resting-place +to which she had been borne with me, sleeping +soundly in the impassive embrace of their mighty +arms; and within the safe-keeping of those arms +lay, too, that uncounted treasure, that vast legacy +which the long-dead leaders of my people had +bequeathed to me for the sacred purpose of restoring +those glories which all men, save myself, +believed to be but a dream of the distant past, +that incomparable inheritance of which I was the +sole lawful heir on earth, and which I was coming +to share with Golden Star when I had once more +raised the Rainbow Banner above the restored +throne of the divine Manco.</p> + +<p>As I thought of all this, the blood that had +lain stagnant through the long years of my +magical death-sleep began to pulse like living +fire through my veins. My new life with all its +marvels became glorified into a waking vision of +new conquests and re-won empire. The past +was a dream both sweet and bitter in its vivid +memories, but still a dream that had been dreamt<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span> +and was done with. The present and the future +were realities, golden and glorious with a hope +justified by the miracle that had made them +possible. I had learnt enough of the new age in +which I had awakened to know that the lust of +gold which had brought the conqueror and the +oppressor into the land of the Children of the +Sun burnt every whit as fiercely in the hearts of +the men who were living now as it had done in +theirs, and that lust, as I had told Hartness and +the others, should now work for me and for the +redemption of my people so that that which had +been their ruin should yet prove their salvation.</p> + +<p>Thus, through the long sunny days and cool, +starlit nights did I, Vilcaroya, last of the Incas, +muse and dream until I once more stood in the +Land of the Four Regions, hale and strong, and +burning with the ardour of my sacred mission, +ready to dare and do all things, and to use without +ruth or scruple that dread power which would +so soon lie within my hands to fulfil my oath and +Golden Star's, and to accomplish the work that I +had come through the shadows of death to do.</p> + +<p>So I came back to the shores of that well-loved +land of mine which, by the reckoning of the new +time into which I had come, had been for more +than three hundred years the sport and prey of +the generations of strangers and oppressors who +had followed those first conquerors of the Children<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span> +of the Sun, whose coming had sounded the hour +of doom and ruin through the length and breadth +of that glorious land of green plains and verdant +valleys, of terraced hills and towering mountains, +which had once been our empire and our home.</p> + +<p>From the mean coast town of wooden houses +where the railway begins we travelled ever upward +over great, grey, sloping deserts, and by rugged +ravines with steep, broken walls of red earth +and ragged rock; through range after range of +mountains that were all strange and hateful to +me, until we swung round the shoulder of a great +crag-crowned mountain, and I saw across a vast +plain, into which range after range of lesser hills +sloped down, the crystal-white peaks of the snow-mountains +towering far beyond the clouds into the +blue sky above them.</p> + +<p>Then I knew that I was coming nearer to the +land that had once been mine, and ere many hours +had passed we stopped in a great city which still +bore its old name of Arequipa, the Place of Rest, +which my own ancestors had given to it. It was +no longer the place of palaces and pleasure-houses, +of flowery gardens and leafy woods that I had +seen it, but above it still gleamed the white snow-fields +and shining peaks of Charchani and Pichu-Pichu, +and between the two great white ranges +still towered the vast, black, snow-crowned cone +of Misti, the smoke-mountain, rising sheer in its<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> +lonely grandeur twelve thousand feet above the +sloping plain on which the city lay.</p> + +<p>As I looked at it again for the first time after so +many years, I asked the professor, as we all called +him, if, since I had been asleep, the mountain had +been rent asunder again as it had been in the +olden times, long before the Spaniards came to +seek gold and blood in the Land of the Four +Regions. He was very learned in such matters, +even as Djama, his friend, was learned in secrets +of life and death, and when he told me that the +fires within it had slept for more years than men +could remember, I was glad. Yet I said nothing +of my inward joy, for had I told them all that I +knew about the valley of black sand and yellow +rock that was hidden behind the far-off wall of +snow which shone so whitely against the blue of +the midway heaven, it might have been many a +long day before we had again set out on our +journey towards the place that was the goal at +once of my hopes and fears.</p> + +<p>We stayed seven days in Arequipa, making our +last preparations for the work that lay before us +and then we went on again by train to Sicuani, in +the valley of the Vilcañota. Then from Sicuani +we journeyed on by road, riding on mules through +a land that was lovely even in my eyes, though its +loveliness was to me only the beauty of ruin and +decay, for this was the heart and centre of that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> +vanished empire whose glories no living eyes but +mine had ever seen.</p> + +<p>I saw wildernesses where there had been gardens, +and gaunt, treeless mountains lying bare to the glare +of the sun. Lakes that had shone encircled with +gardens now spread out dull and stagnant over +the neglected fields. A few ragged fragments of +grey clay walls still rose from the green plain of +Cacha, where I had last seen, in all its glory of gold +and rainbow colours, the holy Temple of Viracocha; +and the great guardian fortress of Piquillacta, which +I had seen stretching its impregnable length and +rearing its unscalable height from mountain to +mountain across the entrance to the once lovely +valley of Cuzco, lay, a huge ragged mass of towering +ruins, splendid even in decay.</p> + +<p>As we passed through the one half-choked +portal that still lay open, I thought, with heavy +heart and bowed-down head, of the great fortress +as I had seen it in the glory of its pride and +strength, of the gallant warriors that had defended +it, and the gay processions that I had +seen winding in and out of its stately gates, +making its hoary walls ring with songs and +laughter, and, farther on, as we rode along the +valley on that sad and yet eager three days' +march of ours, I saw, on the hill-spurs about +me, the black and ragged ruins of the fair cities +and stately temples and palaces that I had seen<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span> +crowded with happy throngs, bright with gold +and colours, and so fair and strong that no man +could have dreamed of the ruin the oppressor +had brought upon them.</p> + +<p>And so, journeying amidst all these sad +memories through a land which, for me, was +peopled with the ghosts of my long-dead friends +and kindred, we came out at length on the +broad, green Plain of the Oracle, and there +before me, still nestling under her guardian hills, +lay, glimmering white and grey under the slanting +sun-rays, all that was left of what had once +been Cuzco, the City of the Sun and the home +of his children. Then, as I lifted my eyes and +gazed upon it through the rising mist of my +tears, I bowed my bared head towards it and +swore, in the sadness and silence of my desolate +heart, that, to the full extent of the power which +I believed was soon to be mine, I would take +life for life and blood for blood, and I would +give sorrow for sorrow and shame for shame, +until I had paid to the full the debt which the +long years of plunder and cruelty and oppression +had heaped up against those who, from generation +to generation, had brought this shame and +ruin on the once bright home of the Children +of the Sun.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER II</h3> + +<h3>BROTHERS OF THE BLOOD</h3> + + +<p>I shall not weary you who perchance may some +day read this story of mine by dwelling on the +sorrow and shame that filled me as I entered +the foul, unlovely streets, and saw the filthy +refuse in the squares of the city that I remembered +so pure and bright and beautiful; +nor yet by telling of the feelings that possessed +me when I saw the poor remains of our desecrated +temples, the places where our vanished +palaces had stood, and the dismantled ruins of +that mighty fortress of Sacsahuaman, which +I had last seen standing palace-crowned and +throned in all its grandeur high up above the +city.</p> + +<p>All this and more you who read must picture +for yourselves, for I have greater things to tell of +than the poor sorrows of a wanderer who had left +his own age and his own kindred far behind him,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span> +and who had come back into a strange world to +find his country a wilderness, and the children of +his people the slaves of strangers.</p> + +<p>It had been settled amongst us that, for the +purpose for which we had come, it would be +necessary to hire a house that should be at once +commodious for our work, sufficiently removed +from the city for privacy, and capable of defence +against intruders if need be. The professor, being +already known in Cuzco as a man of science and +seeker after antiquities, and possessing, moreover, +a special permit from the Government in Lima to +travel and dwell in the interior, and make such +searches as he thought fit, undertook the business +of finding such a house. He made many journeys +in quest of what he sought, and on these journeys +Djama always accompanied him, since he had to +see that the house chosen contained a chamber +suitable for that precious work which he had +undertaken to do in return for the share of +treasure that I was to give to him.</p> + +<p>And while these two were absent I at times +wandered about the city with Joyful Star and +Francis Hartness, who, it was plain to see, +already looked with eyes of love and longing +on her beauty, as in good truth I myself could +have done had I dared, and could I have forgotten +that older love of mine who still lay cold +in her death-sleep in the cave by the lake yonder,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span> +over the mountains to the westward, whither I had +already cast so many longing glances. But at other +times I left them to go upon my own ways, for I +had work on hand which, for the present, did not +concern them.</p> + +<p>I had by this time met and conversed with many +of my people in their own language, which was that +of the labouring classes of my own times, and from +them I had learned that at a village called San +Sebastian, through which we had passed, about +two leagues to the south of the city, there still +dwelt many families of Ayllos—that is to say, +the descendants of those of the old noble Inca +lineage, who had been permitted by their conquerors +to settle here. So one morning I went to +visit an old Indian—as they now called all our +people—named Ullullo, with whom I had made +acquaintance, and at his house I dressed myself +in the native fashion—in an old shirt and short +trousers, with sandals on my feet, and a broad-brimmed, +fringed hat on my head, and covered +myself with a faded poncho, and together we +went on foot to San Sebastian, I looking no +different from the rest of the Indians who were +passing to and fro upon the road.</p> + +<p>I had already seen, while riding through the +village, that the people were different to those of +all other villages that we had come through on +the way. They were taller of stature, prouder of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> +carriage, and fairer of face. The blood showed +red in their cheeks through the light brown of +their skin, and these signs had told me that if +any remnant of the pure Inca race was left these +must be they; and I was soon to have proof that +it was so, although the children of those who had +lived in palaces were now dwelling in huts of mud +and reeds.</p> + +<p>Ullullo led me first to the house of a man named +Tupac Rayca, who was chief among the Indians +of the town. He was great-grandson of that ill-fated +Tupac-Amaru, who, as you know, had +revolted many years before against the oppressors +of his race, and for this, after being forced to +watch the torture and murder of his wife in the +square of Cuzco, had himself been torn limb from +limb by horses.</p> + +<p>We found him alone in a bare room in one of +the better houses of the village. As he stood up +to salute us it needed but a glance to tell me that +in his veins at least the ancient blood of our race +flowed well nigh as purely as it did in my own. +Had it not been for the meanness of his clothing +and the dull, brooding look on his noble features—the +stamp of generations of oppression—I could +have pictured him with the yellow Llautu<a name="FNanchor_A_" id="FNanchor_A_"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span> +his brow, the golden image of the Sun on his +girdled tunic, and the rainbow banner in his +hand, standing amongst the guards of the great +Huayna-Capac himself.</p> + +<p>I asked Ullullo to leave us alone for a little +while, and when he had gone I stepped forward, +and, drawing myself up to my full height, I looked +him in the eyes, and said in the tongue that was +spoken only by those of the divine Inca race,—</p> + +<p>'Tell me, Tupac-Rayca, does a remnant of the +Children of the Sun still dwell in the Land of the +Four Regions, and are they still faithful to the +traditions of their race, and the faith of their +ancestors?'</p> + +<p>As the words left my lips he staggered back a +pace or two with his hands clasped to his forehead, +staring at me from under them as though—as in +very truth I was—some spirit of the past stood +re-embodied before him. Then, coming forward +again and scanning me eagerly from head to +foot, he whispered in the same tongue—by +the Lord of Light how those familiar accents +thrilled my ears as I heard them again after so +long!</p> + +<p>'Who are you—a stranger—that comes in the +image of those long dead, to ask me such a +question in the tongue that may only be spoken +when none save those of the Blood are present?'</p> + +<p>'One who is of the Blood himself!' I answered,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> +taking a stride towards him, and stretching out +my hand. 'Fear not, Tupac-Rayca, son of him +that suffered, I am a friend, and have come from +afar to work as a friend with you and others of the +Blood that may still be left in the land, with a +great and holy purpose of which you shall know +ere long.'</p> + +<p>He grasped my hand and bowed over it in +silence for a while. Then he stepped back and +looked at me again, murmuring,—</p> + +<p>'Can it be so? Has the divine Manco come +back from the Mansions of the Sun to save the +remnant of his children, or has Vilcaroya broken +the bonds of his death-sleep and come to fulfil +the oath he swore with Golden Star before the +altar in the Sanctuary? I know all the Children +of the Blood that are left in the land, and I have +never seen your face before, yet you are of the +Blood. Who are you—Lord?'</p> + +<p>The last word seemed forced from his lips by +some power other than his own will, and it +sounded most pleasant to me, for it told me +that, without knowing my name, and seeing me +only as a stranger, he had recognised the stamp +of my divine ancestry, and this promised well for +the progress of the work I had in hand. I +answered him kindly, and yet as one speaking +to another who is scarce his equal, and said,—</p> + +<p>'My name matters not now or here, Tupac, for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> +we are but two, and I might lie to you, and you +would have no proof of my truth or falsehood. +But if you will do as I bid you, to-night you +shall know and all shall be made plain and with +ample proof. Are you willing to give me your +aid?'</p> + +<p>He picked up a rude hoe that stood in a corner +of the room, and laying it across his shoulder +after the manner of one who bears a burden, +bowed his head and answered,—</p> + +<p>'The Son of the Sun has but to speak, and I +and all his slaves will obey.'</p> + +<p>What he had done was an act of homage, which, +in the olden time, was paid only to him who wore +the imperial Llautu, and proved to me how faithfully +the old traditions had been preserved in +secret.</p> + +<p>'That is well said, Tupac,' I replied, speaking +now as a sovereign might speak to a faithful +subject, 'and in the days to come fear not that +I shall forget this, your first act of unasked-for +homage. Now, hear me. Are there twenty men +of the Blood in this village—men who are faithful +and can be trusted even to the death?'</p> + +<p>'There are five hundred here, Lord, and as +many thousands within the valley, whose blood +has flowed pure from the olden times, unpolluted +by a single stain of Spanish dirt. What would +you with them?'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span></p> + +<p>'I asked not for hundreds or thousands,' I said, +right glad at heart to hear such good tidings. +'For the present I need but a score, so do you +choose me twenty of the noblest blood and the +best judgment, and an hour before midnight let +them be with you on the plain behind the +Sacsahuaman. Let them come well provided +with torches or candles, and tools, levers, and +hammers and spades. Tell them what has +passed between us, but nothing of the guesses +that you may have made in your own mind +while we have been talking, and leave the rest +to me. Can you do that?'</p> + +<p>'It shall be done, Lord,' he answered, still +bending before me with the shaft of the hoe +across his shoulders, 'and we will wait and toil +in patience till the Son of the Sun shall please +to reveal himself to the eyes of his servants.'</p> + +<p>'Nor shall you have to wait long,' I said. 'Now +put that off your back and take my hand again, +for we are not Inca and servant yet, only two men +of the Blood, and brothers of a fallen race who are +joined together to perform a holy work. Now farewell, +Tupac, till to-night. Choose your companions +well, and fear not but that your services and your +faithfulness shall have their due reward.'</p> + +<p>He put his hand humbly and tremblingly into +mine, bowing low over it, and so I left him, standing +there with bent head, not daring to look up<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> +until the door closed behind me. Then Ullullo and +I went back into the city, and as we crossed the +great square on our way to Ullullo's house, I saw +my four English friends standing among the +market people by the fountain in the centre. +We passed close to them, and I heard my name +spoken by Joyful Star to her brother, who +answered her and said,—</p> + +<p>'I daresay we shall find he is making friends +again with some of these filthy Indian compatriots +of his.'</p> + +<p>I hated him from that moment for his bitter +words, and swore in my heart that some day he +should pay for them, for I loved my people, and +pitied them in their misery and degradation. I +stopped beside them, and my heart was beating +hard as I listened for what Joyful Star would say, +and I have remembered her words, even as I +have remembered his. She looked at him with +the light of anger in her eyes and said,—</p> + +<p>'For shame, Laurens! I couldn't have believed +that you would have said such a thing. If you +belonged to a race that had been enslaved and +plundered by these brutes of Spaniards and +Peruvians for three centuries and a half, do you +think you would be any better than these poor +fellows? And, besides, whatever they are, they +are Vilcaroya's people, and he is our friend.'</p> + +<p>I could have fallen on the stones and kissed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> +her feet for those sweet words of hers, and I +moved away quickly for fear I should betray myself, +and went with a swelling heart and mingled +tears of love and anger in my eyes to old Ullullo's +house, where I changed my clothes again, and then, +as it was nearly dinner time, which, as you know, +is in the evening in Spanish countries, I went back +to the house where we were lodging, wondering +what they would think if they could have understood +the words that had passed between Tupac-Rayca +and myself.</p> + +<p>When I met them again I saw that they would +willingly have learned what had become of me +during the day, but I answered their inquiries by +telling them nothing more and yet a great deal less +than the truth, and saying that I had spent the day +revisiting old scenes, and learning what I could of +the present condition of my people. This satisfied +them outwardly at least, though I saw a look in +Djama's eyes which told me that he suspected +more of the truth than it suited my purpose to tell +him.</p> + +<p>Then our conversation turned to the matter of +procuring a house, such as I have spoken of, and +the professor told me that he had heard of a +hacienda, well built and solid, and standing in its +own domain, about three leagues across the valley +to the westward, on a secluded little plain among +the hills, which would serve our purpose excellently;<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> +but the owner of it wished to sell it, and 'with the +stupidity of these Peruvians,' as he said, would not +hire it out to us but would only sell it, and the +price was twenty thousand soles, or dollars of Peru, +which was two thousand pounds in English money.</p> + +<p>'It is a great pity,' said the professor, when he +had finished telling me about it, 'for it doesn't seem +as though there was another house in the neighbourhood +of Cuzco that would suit our purpose, and +this one would do perfectly.'</p> + +<p>'Of course, if the fellow won't let it there's no +use thinking any more about the matter, for two +thousand pounds is entirely out of the question. +It seems to me that the expedition will be quite +expensive enough without the luxury of buying +houses at fancy prices.'</p> + +<p>It was Djama who spoke. No one else at our +table could have spoken like that. I heard him in +silence, for I could not trust myself to speak for the +anger that was rising within me. I saw Joyful Star +raise her eyelids and look at him with a swift +glance that meant much; but she, too, said nothing; +and then, looking at me, he spoke again and +said,—</p> + +<p>'Of course, if His Highness'—for so he always +spoke of me when no strangers were present—'would +just unlock one of those treasure-houses of +his, the matter would be easy enough, but I suppose +that's outside the contract.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span></p> + +<p>I still kept silence, knowing as I did what the +night was to bring forth. But Francis Hartness +answered for me, and said,—</p> + +<p>'I don't think you can quite put it that way, +Djama, if you'll excuse me saying so. If I am +not mistaken, it has been clearly understood +that the first treasure-house to be unlocked is +the one that holds Vilcaroya's greatest treasure—his +wife—and what you say seems to suggest—'</p> + +<p>'It is enough!' I said, unconsciously speaking +in my growing anger in the same imperious tone +that I had used but a few hours before to Tupac. +'Let the house be bought. I will charge myself +with the cost, and I will be the debtor of my +friends no longer.'</p> + +<p>They stared at me as I spoke, for hitherto I +had spoken to them as a child rather than as +a man; as an inferior, rather than as an equal. I +saw a smile that was not pleasant to look upon +pass swiftly over Djama's mouth, but he kept +silence, and the professor said to me,—</p> + +<p>'Are you really in earnest, Vilcaroya? You +know, according to our bargain, we have no +claim on you until our part of the work is done. +None of us have any desire to learn your secrets.'</p> + +<p>'I am not talking of secrets,' I said, breaking +into his speech, 'and one of my race does not +speak to make a liar of himself. What I say +I can do and will, for I wish the work to begin<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> +at once. Do you think I have not waited long +enough for my beloved, my sister and my +wife?'</p> + +<p>'Your what!' cried Joyful Star, rising suddenly +from her seat, and staring at me with fixed and +wide-opened eyes. 'Your sister! Oh, Vilcaroya, +surely this is not true!' and as she said this I +saw her cheeks grow pale and her lips tremble.</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I answered, 'it is true. Why should +I lie to my new sister and friend, Joyful Star? +Golden Star was the daughter of my father, +the great Huayna-Capac, though our mothers +were not the same.'</p> + +<p>I had no time to finish my speech, for with +a look of unutterable horror in her eyes, which +pierced me to the heart and seemed to sever it +in twain, she cried,—</p> + +<p>'Oh, no, no! that is too horrible! I don't want +to hear any more. I will go back to England +to-morrow. Laurens, come to my room; I want +to speak to you at once.'</p> + +<p>So saying, she went to the door and opened +it and went out, followed by her brother, who +looked at me as he passed me with a look which +I never forgot or forgave, for it was like the +words that I had heard him say to her in the +square.</p> + +<p>'What is this?' I said to the professor when +the door had closed behind them. 'What have<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> +I said or done that Joyful Star should look with +horror upon me and say such cruel words?'</p> + +<p>I saw him exchange glances full of meaning +with the English soldier before he answered me; +and then, leaning his arms on the table in front +of him, he said, in that quiet, calm voice of his,—</p> + +<p>'My dear Vilcaroya, it is a very strange thing, +and, as far as Miss Djama is concerned, perhaps, +a very great pity that this has never come out +before, for without knowing it you have given +her a shock that may have very painful consequences. +No, don't interrupt me now, for the +sooner I can make you understand the meaning +of your words to her the better. It is this way: +we know, of course, that in your day and among +your people sister-marriage was held to be the +most sacred of all marriages. We know that +from such a marriage only might spring the +wearer of the imperial Borla, but to us the idea +is so unutterably horrible and revolting that of +all the crimes that could be committed by one +of our race that would be the most fearful. It +cannot even be discussed amongst us, and yet +you, in the most perfect innocence, have spoken +of it in the presence—Good Heavens, Hartness! +what is to be done? Do you think Miss Djama +was really in earnest when she talked of going +back to England to-morrow? It is impossible—it +would ruin everything!'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span></p> + +<p>I kept silence, for my sorrow and wonder were +too great for words, but I listened eagerly for +what Francis Hartness would say in reply.</p> + +<p>'She was in earnest when she spoke,' he said, +as quietly as the professor had spoken; 'but, if +the doctor has as much sense as I give him +credit for, she will have seen the thing in a +different light by this time. Of course, she has +read Prescott, and she really knows as much +about the marriage customs of the ancient Incas +as we do. In fact, to tell you the truth'—and +as he said this I saw him frown, and an angry +light came into his eyes that I had never seen +in them before—'I really can hardly understand +how, knowing that as she does know it, she can +have been as horrified as she certainly was. She +knows perfectly well that Vilcaroya has come +at a single step, as it were, from his age into +ours, and so must have brought all the ideas +and beliefs of his time and his people with +him. Depend upon it, a little reflection will +very soon show her that, horrible and all as +the idea must naturally have appeared to her +at the first shock of hearing it, from Vilcaroya's +point of view there is nothing in it but +what is perfectly natural and proper. Now, to +my mind, the matter is much more sad and +serious for Vilcaroya himself than for anyone +else.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span></p> + +<p>As he said this he turned from the professor to +me and went on, addressing me in a tone so frank +and kindly that ever afterwards I looked upon +him as my friend and my brother,—</p> + +<p>'It's not a pleasant thing for me to say, and it +must, of course, be a very painful one for you to +hear; still, it has got to be said some time or +other, and, unless I am wrong in what I think of +you, I believe you are man enough to hear it and +to agree with me that it had better be said now +than later on, when the saying of it might be +tenfold more painful both to you and us.'</p> + +<p>'Say on,' I said shortly. 'Your tongue is +straight and your eyes look into mine as those +of a friend should look. I am listening.'</p> + +<p>'I would wish for no better friend than you, +Vilcaroya, after that, for I know what you mean. +Now, what I have to say is this. We know, of +course, that you look upon yourself as doubly +married to this love of yours, who is dead and, +like you, may yet be alive again. You are bound +to her, not only by a marriage which, in the time +that it took place, was perfectly lawful and natural, +but also by the oath that you took together. But +you have come back to the world in another age +and among another people, and now that form of +marriage is looked upon by all civilised humanity, +not only as unlawful, but, as the professor has just +said, unnatural and horrible beyond conception.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span></p> + +<p>'Therefore, if Golden Star is restored to life, +for you to love her, save as a brother, or for you +to consummate the union which, as you have told +us, began and ended before the altar of the Sun, +would be to make not only yourself, but your—your +sister, Golden Star, as well, looked upon with +horror and loathing by every civilised man and +woman who knew your story. I am speaking +strongly, because it is necessary.</p> + +<p>'You might succeed in all your aims, you might +realise every ambition of your life, and yet I tell +you it is Heaven's own truth, that if you took +Golden Star to sit beside you on the throne of +the Incas as your wife and queen, you would place +her upon a pinnacle of infamy which men would +spit upon and women turn their backs on. The +reward of all your labours, the price of all your +treasures, no matter how great they might be, +would be nothing but a curse that would fall +heavily on you, but a thousand times more heavily +on the woman whom you have loved best in all +the world.'</p> + +<p>He stopped, and they both sat and looked at +me in silence, awaiting for me to answer him. As +for me, I felt my spirit wandering over a bare +wilderness where all was dark.</p> + +<p>I knew that he had spoken truth, strange as +the truth seemed to me, for no man could have +heard his voice and seen the steady light in his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span> +eyes, without knowing that he was a true man, +and so spoke the truth. The moments passed, +and I could still find no words to say. Then +the silence was broken by the opening of the +door, and Djama came in and said,—</p> + +<p>'My sister wishes you to excuse her coming +back to the table. Of course, I have explained +matters to her, and I think she now sees them +in a different light, but for some reason or other +she seems strangely shaken. You know how +extremely sensitive she is, and so, as her doctor, +as well as her brother, I have sent her to bed. +She wasn't really fit to come back after what +has happened, and a night's rest will be the best +thing in the world for her. I suppose you two +have explained things to His Highness as +well, eh?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said, rising from my seat. 'It has been +explained to me. I do not understand all now, +but I must think, and think alone, so I will go.'</p> + +<p>Then I went to Francis Hartness and held out +my hand to him and said, after the fashion of +the English,—</p> + +<p>'Good-night, Captain Hartness. You have +wounded me sorely with your words, yet you +have spoken them as only a friend could speak +them. From now till the day of my death or +yours, Vilcaroya Inca is your friend, and all his +people are your servants.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span></p> + +<p>Then I took my hand from his, and bowing +farewell to the others, walked swiftly out of the +room and got my cloak, and went out into the +city to think in silence by myself over the strange +and terrible things that I had heard, and to calm +my spirit before I went to do the work which, in +a few hours, would be awaiting me on the hills +behind the Sacsahuaman.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span></p> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_" id="Footnote_A_"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_"><span class="label">[A]</span></a> The yellow Llautu, or fringed turban of wool, worn on the +brows, was the distinguishing mark of the sacred Inca race. The +scarlet was worn only by the reigning Inca—'Son of the Sun.' Its +fringe, called the 'borla,' was mingled with threads of gold.</p></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER III</h3> + +<h3>IN THE HALL OF GOLD</h3> + + +<p>I went first to Ullullo's house and changed my +clothing, so that I might the more easily lose +myself among the hundreds of Indians about the +streets of the city, for something told me that +Djama might make an attempt to discover the +meaning of what I had said about the house by +following me and learning, if possible, the secret +of my movements; for he must have known that, +being without money as I was, save for the few +dollars that the professor had lent me, it would +not be possible for me to do as I had said, unless +one, at least, of the hiding-places of the old +treasures was within easy reach so that I could +take sufficient gold out of it by the next day to +fulfil my promise.</p> + +<p>When I changed my clothes I put a dagger into +my belt, and a revolver, which Francis Hartness +had already taught me how to use, into a case<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> +slung at my hip, and hidden by my jacket and +the long folds of my poncho. Then I went back +into the great square, and across it up the street +in which we had our lodgings. As I passed the +house I saw Djama standing in the archway +leading into the courtyard, smoking a cigar. I +turned and looked him in the face as I went by, +slouching and trailing my sandalled feet after +the fashion of the natives. He looked at me, but +I saw no recognition in his eyes. Then as I +walked on there came a thought to me.</p> + +<p>I hurried to Ullullo's house once more and +brought him back with me, telling him on the +way what I wanted him to do for me. When we +reached the house again we saw Djama standing +in the courtyard, and Ullullo, doing as I had bid +him, went in to him, and told him in Spanish, +which I could not speak, that if he would give +him ten dollars he should learn the secret of my +goings and comings, and where I was to find the +gold with which to pay for the hacienda. Djama +instantly promised him the money, as I thought +he would, and Ullullo told him to be at the end +of the street which is now called El Triunfo at +eleven o'clock that night. He was to come alone, +for if anyone came with him he would learn +nothing. As you will soon see, I had two objects +to serve in doing this.</p> + +<p>When Ullullo came back and told me that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span> +Djama would be there, I bade him wait for me +at the same place and hour, and then I went away +alone out of the city and up a path which led +towards the mountains to the north. There, alone +and in silence, I communed with my own soul, +at first in sorrow, yet slowly becoming more and +more peaceful in heart, even as one who is told +that he is to die on a certain day first rages +against his doom and then learns to contemplate +with calmness that which there is no hope +of escaping. The words of the professor and +Francis Hartness had shown me that in the +world to which I had returned my sister Golden +Star could now never be my wife and queen, and +the more I pondered on what they had said, the +more plainly it appeared to me that this was the +truth, however bitter it might seem.</p> + +<p>Yet there was something else in my heart, +although at that time I did not dare even to let +my inmost thoughts dwell upon it, which in some +way dulled the pain of the blow that had fallen +upon me, and reconciled me to the parting which +in one sense must now be eternal. The longer I +pondered the more deeply did that look of horror +which I had seen in the eyes of Joyful Star burn +into my soul, and the more clearly did the words +that she had spoken ring in my ears. She had +said that it was horrible and that it was impossible, +and she was to me as one of those<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> +bright angels who, according to our ancient faith, +awaited the heroes and sages of our race in the +Mansions of the Sun—a being so far above me +that I could look upon her only as a mortal +might look from afar upon a daughter of the +Celestials.</p> + +<p>Thus, musing in silence and solitude on the +wild mountain-side, now looking back into my +distant past, and now hazarding a glance into +the fast-approaching future, the hours slipped by +quickly for me, and I heard the bells of the +churches—bells which they had told me had +been cast out of the copper and gold and silver +that our conquerors had taken from our temples +and palaces—chiming the half-hour before eleven.</p> + +<p>So I turned back to the city, and made haste to +the place where Djama and Ullullo would be waiting +for me. I found them there talking together, +and without discovering myself to Djama, I told +Ullullo in Quichua to follow me with the Englishman. +Then I went on swiftly along the rivulet +of Tullamayo, past the terrace of Rocca Inca, and +along the smooth, dark wall of what had once +been the Yachahuasi, or College of the Youths, +and so out of the city and the gorge of the little +river Rodadero. Then, with the two still following +me a few yards behind, I climbed the lower +terraces of the Colcompata, or the Granaries, where +the divine Manco built his first palace, and then<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span> +on up the hillside to the Tiupunco, or Gate of +Sand, which led through the fragments of what +had once been the outer wall of the great +fortress, and so on to the little level pampa +of the Rodadero, which was my meeting-place +with Tupac.</p> + +<p>Now as I went I began to sing one of our +ancient songs, which was the signal that I had +agreed upon with Tupac, and presently, one after +another, silent, stealthy forms crept out from the +angles of the great zig-zag wall and came towards +me. One of them, taller than the rest, threw an +iron bar that he was carrying across his shoulders, +and came and stood before me with bowed-down +head, waiting for me to speak. I knew that it +was Tupac, and I said to him,—</p> + +<p>'Are the Children of the Sun ready to do the +bidding of his Son?'</p> + +<p>'They are, Lord!' he replied. 'Here are twenty +who have sworn by the heart of the divine Manco +to do all things lawful and unlawful, even to the +death, at the bidding of him who shall prove +himself to be the true heir of the royal Llautu.'</p> + +<p>'It is good,' I said, 'and the proof shall soon +be given. Now, take the stranger yonder; do +him no harm, but bind his eyes so that he cannot +see, and tie his hands behind him. Then follow +me.'</p> + +<p>Instantly the stealthy forms closed around<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span> +Djama. Not a word was spoken save his startled, +angry exclamation, which was soon stifled, and +then they brought him along after me, I going +first and Tupac following close behind me. Like +a string of shadows we moved across the plain +past the great carved rock which is still called the +Inca's Seat, and over the ridge of the Sliding +Stones and down into the valley beyond, which is +thickly strewn with great rock-masses carved into +seats, and altars, and baths, and chambers, of +which no man knows the origin, and which were +ancient when Manco-Capac and Mama-Occlu first +came into the land.</p> + +<p>The greatest of these is a high white rock +carved all over into steps and seats and altars +and basins, which are said to have been made to +catch the blood of the living sacrifices that were +offered up here by a race of men whose name has +been forgotten. It is called in our language the +Sayacusca, or Tired Stone, for an old tradition +says that ages ago it was brought from the +mountains by the toil of ten thousand men, and +when it reached its present place it rolled over +and killed three hundred of them, and could never +be moved again upon its journey.</p> + +<p>On the south side of this there is a great cleft +from the top to the bottom, and up the sides of +this cleft are the two halves of a stairway, which +was carved there before some earthquake rent the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> +stone in twain, and under this is a deep dark pool +of water. At the entrance to the cleft I stopped +and beckoned to the others to come round me. +Then I told them that they were about to see that +which no man then alive on earth had ever seen, +and made all swear by the Glory of the Sun that +each and every one of them would slay without +pity him who revealed anything seen or heard that +night, even though he were his own brother, or his +own father, or his own son. As for Djama, they +held him there bound and blindfolded amongst +them, and when he tried to speak they stopped +his mouth at my bidding, for I had told them that +I would be answerable for him, since I had brought +him here for my own purposes.</p> + +<p>Then I made two of the men stretch a cord +tightly across the mouth of the cleft close down to +the ground, and to the middle of this I tied +another cord, and stretched it out straight twelve +foot-lengths from the centre, and here I bade them +clear away the bushes, and dig. Then axe and +hoe and spade went to work. In that clear air, +and under that cloudless sky, the stars gave light +enough to work by, and soon a space had been +cleared, and a round hole about three feet across +was being dug down through the loose, rocky +soil.</p> + +<p>When it was about half the depth of a man +the spades struck on the solid rock below, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span> +could go no farther. When Tupac told me of +this, I, who had been standing by the cleft, looking—full +of strange thoughts—down into the dark +pool of water, called the man who had been digging +out of the hole, and, taking an iron bar from +Tupac, I dropped into it.</p> + +<p>I sought about the bottom with my hands for a +few moments till I found the outline of a squared +stone that had been let into the rock. In the +centre of this I found a hole, out of which I picked +the dirt with my dagger. Then, putting the end +of my iron bar into it, I pulled, and the stone +turned over on a hinge, leaving an opening half its +size. Down this I thrust my arm, and found a +chain of copper which hung down into a deep well +below. I pulled this with all my strength until +something gave way at the bottom, then I drew +the chain up, and cast my iron bar under it across +the hole. As I did this, I heard the deep, +smothered roar of waters rushing away far below +me into the bowels of the earth.</p> + +<p>Then I got out of the hole and went back to the +cleft. I lit a candle and looked down at the pool. +It was no longer stagnant now, but seething and +eddying like a whirlpool. I beckoned to Tupac, +who was standing a little way behind me, and as +he came and looked over my shoulder I pointed +down into the dark gulf, out of which the bottom +was rapidly falling, and said,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'See, the waters are opening the way by which +the Son of the Sun shall go into his kingdom. +Watch now, and listen!'</p> + +<p>'Son of the Sun and Lord of the Four Regions, +it is true!' he whispered as the waters eddied +round faster and faster, and gurgled and rattled +down into some unknown abyss. Soon they +vanished altogether, leaving only a dark, black, +and seemingly fathomless cavern in the place +where they had been. I waited until the sound +of the last gurgle had died away in the depths, +and then I turned to Tupac and said,—</p> + +<p>'The way is open. Tell Ullullo to bring the +lantern and light it. There must be no other +light. You and the rest follow me, and let two +strong men bring the stranger.'</p> + +<p>He did as I bade him, and when I had lit the +lantern I cast its rays about the gulf beneath me +till I found the continuation of the broken stairway +above, and then picking my way carefully down +the dank, slimy steps, I led the way into the +heart of the rock, the rest following, guided by +the spreading ray of light in front of me.'</p> + +<p>I counted fifty steps, and then stopped and +turned sharply to the right. The fiftieth step +ended against a wall of rock, still dripping with +the water that was running down from the arched +roof of the chamber. I measured ten spans with +my hand from the wall where the steps ended,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span> +and made a mark with my dagger on the rock. +Then from the floor I measured eight spans in a +line across the mark. Where the eighth span +ended I made another mark, and with the help +of my lantern I found a silver socket let into the +rock. It was a plate with a hole in the centre +large enough to admit the iron bar which I had +brought for the purpose. I put it in, and whispering +to Tupac to help me, we gripped the bar, +and after two or three hard pulls felt it coming +towards us.</p> + +<p>A great slab of rock, which fitted into the +wall with all the perfection that our old Inca +masons could give it, turned on a central hinge, +leaving a space that two men could have walked +through abreast.</p> + +<p>'Go in,' I said to Tupac, 'and let all follow +you.'</p> + +<p>He obeyed, and standing by the opening with +a ray of my lantern shooting across it, I watched +them file past one by one until all had gone in. +Then I followed, and as I crossed the threshold +set my shoulder against the edge of the slab and +pushed it back into its place.</p> + +<p>Now I covered my lantern with my poncho +and cried aloud in the darkness,—</p> + +<p>'Let the torches be got ready, but let no light +be struck till that which is to be revealed may +be seen.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span></p> + +<p>A low murmur answered me, and then, still +keeping my lantern hidden, I felt my way along +the wall, treading softly as a mountain lion +approaching its prey, until I had counted forty +paces. The fortieth brought me to a doorway, +through which I turned. Five paces more +brought me to another turning, ten more to the +end of the passage, and then I uncovered my +light and found myself in a little square chamber +hewn out of the rock and surrounded with stone +chests covered with lids of copper.</p> + +<p>In the centre of the chamber stood a smaller +one, all of metal. I set my lantern down on one +of the others so that the light fell across this one; +then I raised the lid, and there before me lay, +perfect as they had been on the day when Anda-Huillac, +last High Priest of the Sun, had laid +them there, the imperial robes and insignia that +had last been worn by the ill-fated Huascar, son +of the great Huayna-Capac.</p> + +<p>Quickly throwing off the mean garments that +I wore, I dressed myself in them. Then, binding +the golden sandals on my feet, and clasping the +long mantle emblazoned in gold and jewels with +the symbols of the Sun and his sister-wife the +Moon across my shoulders, I wound the scarlet +Llautu around my head, with the crimson fringe +of the Borla interlaced with gold falling upon +my brow, and then, closing the chest, I took up<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> +my lantern and went back along the passages I +had traversed.</p> + +<p>In the middle of the last one I put my lantern +down with the glass against the wall, and feeling +my way into the doorway, which opened on to +the chamber in which the others were awaiting +me, I cried, in a voice that echoed strangely +through the great chamber,—</p> + +<p>'Let the torches be kindled, and let the Children +of the Sun look upon their Lord!'</p> + +<p>I heard a shuffling of feet and a whispering of +many voices. Then lights were struck, and I +stepped back quickly into the shadow of the +doorway. I saw the glow of light grow into a +glare that was flashed back in a thousand many-coloured +rays from the walls of the chamber. I +heard a deep, low cry of wonder, and then I +strode out into the midst and said,—</p> + +<p>'I am he who went into the shadows at the +bidding of our Father the Sun, and by his will +I have returned to bring deliverance to his +children!'</p> + +<p>For one moment of affrighted amazement they +stared wide-eyed at me standing there before them, +as though Huayna-Capac himself had returned +from the Mansions of the Sun to resume his +sceptre and his crown. Then, with one accord, +they sank on their knees before me, holding their +torches above their bent heads and murmuring,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Hail, Son of the Sun and deliverer of his +children, who hast come to bring the daylight +back to the long-darkened Land of the Four +Regions!'</p> + +<p>I looked at them and saw Djama standing erect, +still bound and blindfold, in the midst of them. +I went through the kneeling forms to him, and +taking the bandage from his eyes stepped back, +and while he was blinking at the light of the +torches, said to him in English,—</p> + +<p>'Look about you, Laurens Djama, and tell me +if you believe now that I, the friend of the filthy +Indians whom you despise, can do that which I +have said?'</p> + +<p>He was still half dazzled by the glare of the +torches and the thousand rays of many colours +that were flashing about him. Wherever his wondering +glance fell it saw great golden plates +covering the walls, thick-set with jewels, and +in front of him, piled up against the end wall +of the chamber, a shining heap of gold bars in +the shape of a pyramid reaching to the roof +of the chamber, and on either side of this, half +way up, was a great image of the Sun, like to +that which in the olden times stood above the altar +in the sanctuary of the great temple of Cuzco, +each with its centre fashioned as a human face, +with great flashing diamonds for eyes, with lips +of rubies, and long pendants of emeralds hanging<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> +from the ears, and all round a hundred curving +rays of gold edged and lined with jewels.</p> + +<p>He stared about him, open-eyed and open-mouthed +with amazement. Then his eyes fell +on me, and he started forward and stared me in +the face for a moment. Then he gasped,—</p> + +<p>'Vilcaroya, is it you, or am I dreaming? +Where have you brought me to?'</p> + +<p>'To one of the treasure-houses that you so +longed to see,' I said, 'so that you might see and +believe that I told you no idle tale, and that I +can perform my promise if you can perform yours.'</p> + +<p>Then I turned my back on him and went to +the foot of the pyramid, and, taking my place +in front of it, I said to those who still knelt +before me in silence,—</p> + +<p>'Let those of his children who are faithful +to their Father the Sun rise and come without +falsehood in their hearts, and say if they now +believe that that which was foretold long ago, +when the darkness fell over the land, has in very +truth come to pass.'</p> + +<p>They rose from their knees and came towards +me in a half circle, carrying their torches. They +stopped about five paces from me, looking at +me through a little space with wondering eyes +full of worship. Then they bowed their heads +again, and Tupac came from the midst of them, +and, casting himself prone at my feet, yet not<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span> +daring even to touch my sandals, said in a broken +voice,—</p> + +<p>'Son of the Sun, heir of heaven and lord of +earth, we have seen thy wisdom and thy majesty. +None but one of thy royal line—nay, none but +thee, oh, Vilcaroya, son of Huayna-Capac, and +brother of Huascar, last of the Incas, could have +known the secret that thou hast brought with +thee from the past into the present. We are +thy children and thy slaves, and all the men +of the Blood that are left in the Land of the +Four Regions shall hail thee lord as we do, and +own no other master save thee, Vilcaroya Inca, +from now until the hour when their father, the +Lord of Life, shall call them back to the Mansions +of the Sun. We are thine, and we will serve +thee, ourselves and our wives and our children, +as our fathers served thy father in the days when +there was yet peace and happiness in the land.'</p> + +<p>'And if ye are but faithful,' I said, 'and if the +Lord, my father, who rules the day, and his +sister, my mother, who rules the night, shall give +me strength and wisdom to use the power that +is mine, I will give you back peace and happiness, +and the stranger and the oppressor shall be driven +from the land, and the homes of the Children of +the Sun shall again be full of light. Rise now, +Tupac, and let ten of the men give their torches +to the others and make ready to do my bidding.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span></p> + +<p>He rose, and it was done. Then I called Djama +to me and said,—</p> + +<p>'What you have seen here to-night is a dream. +When your eyes open again on the outer world, +remember what I have said. Your hand has +brought me from the grave to the throne, and +you must obey me as these do. Let me but +know that you have spoken one word, even to +Joyful Star herself, concerning what you have +seen here to-night, and I will show you how an +Inca deals with one who dares to disobey him. +Keep silence and have patience, and perform +that which you have promised, and you shall +go back to your own land loaded with gold and +jewels. Fail, and the fragments of your body +shall be sent north and south and east and west +throughout the Land of the Four Regions, and +your name shall be one of shame in the ears of +my people for ever.'</p> + +<p>For a moment he looked me in the eyes, and +I saw his lips moving as though he was striving +to shape some answer to my words. Then his +face grew grey, and his knees shook as he stood. +Then I called to Tupac, and bade him bind his +eyes again and lead him away, and as soon as +his sight was taken from him I bade the ten +men who had given up their torches take off +their ponchos and fill them with as many of the +golden bars as each one could carry, and when<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> +this was done, I ordered all the torches save one +to be extinguished. This one I took, and went +with it into the passage where I had left my +lantern. Then I dashed it against the wall and +vanished into the darkness.</p> + +<p>I took my lantern, and hiding the light carefully, +went back to the little chamber, where I +took off my robes and sandals and the imperial +Llautu, and put them back into the chest. Then +I put on my mean attire again and went back into +the Hall of Gold. Signing to the others to follow +me, I turned the stone door on its pivot again, +and watched them file past me as before. Then, +going out last, I closed the portal after me and +lighted them up the steps with my lantern.</p> + +<p>When we all once more stood in the open air by +the cleft I went to the hole and released the chain. +Instantly the roar of waters broke out again, and +I bade them fill the hole up and put turf over it, +and trample it down and scatter the bushes over +it; and that being done, we took our way back +again across the plain towards the fortress, still +leading Djama blindfold in our midst.</p> + +<p>We took him by the gate of Viracocha into the +fortress, across its upper part, where the three +crosses stood, and down on to the zigzag road +which leads into the eastern part of the city, and +there we unbound his eyes, and I bade him go to +the house and make ready to receive me early in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> +the morning, telling our friends that I should +arrive with some packages of Indian merchandise +and metals from one of my mines, for, as I should +have told you before, I had come to Cuzco in the +character of an owner of mines who had lived +long in Europe and had returned to supervise +the working of my property.</p> + +<p>I and Tupac and his companions then went +back into the hills, and without entering the city +made our way by twos and threes into the village +of San Sebastian. We met at Tupac's house, and +there I explained to them as much of my plans +and purposes as I thought fit for them to know, +and showed them that the time was not yet come +for them to make use of the treasures that I would +share with them. But to each man I gave two +pounds' weight of gold to be left in Tupac's care +till it could be taken into the cities of the south +and there changed for silver coins. Then I had a +list made of their names, and promised them, after +reminding them of their oaths, that when I once +more sat on the throne of the divine Manco, their +fidelity should be well remembered.</p> + +<p>The next morning we loaded the gold in bales +of the coca-leaf, great quantities of which are +taken every day into Cuzco, upon four mules, +and these I sent to our house while I went back +with Ullullo and put on my English clothing. +Then I followed, and found that the bags of coca<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> +had already arrived. They were carried up to my +own room, and there, in the presence of Djama +and Joyful Star, the professor and Francis Hartness, +I took out the gold ingots and built them up +in a pyramid before them.</p> + +<p>I could see from their amazement that, whether +from fear or faith, Djama had obeyed me, and said +nothing of what he had seen during the night. +As for me, I said but little. I gave them the gold, +and that day the professor and Djama, acting as +my agents, sold it to some of the merchants of +Cuzco as the product of my mines. The price was +more than twice as much as was needed for the +hacienda, so with the rest I discharged my debt +and made myself once more a free man.</p> + +<p>There is no need for me to dwell upon our +dealings with the owner of the hacienda, and therefore +it will suffice for me to say, before ten days +more had passed the purchase-money had been +paid, we had taken up our abode there, and +installed Joyful Star as housewife, with faithful +servants chosen by myself from among the +Children of the Blood. Djama, who had been +strangely silent and reserved with all of us since +the lesson I had taught him in the Hall of Gold, +had taken possession of the chamber which was +devoted to his uses, and had put all his apparatus +in order for the great work that was to be done +there.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span></p> + +<p>So on the fourteenth day, such was the power +of my gold and of my longings, all things were +ready, and at daybreak on the fifteenth day we +rode at the head of our little mule train out of +the courtyard of the hacienda on our way to +the resting-place of Golden Star.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER IV</h3> + +<h3>THE SISTER STARS</h3> + + +<p>For five long days we travelled slowly and toilfully +on our way from the valley of Cuzco to that +other where Golden Star lay sleeping beside the +lake. Over high plains and pleasant valleys, +through deep, dark gorges and ravines, to whose +lowest depths the sun but seldom reaches, and +then but for an hour or two, along narrow pathways +cut into the living rock on the mountain side, +with precipices on one hand falling thousands of +feet into the dark abysses, where the torrents +roared and foamed, and on the other the great +rock-walls of the mountain soaring up into the +sky yet more thousands of feet above us.</p> + +<p>I saw the mighty crests of Saljantai and +Umantai rising snow-crowned from earth to +heaven, unchanged in their eternal grandeur since +the long-distant day on which I had last beheld +them. I rode with saddened heart past the ruins<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span> +of Lima Tambo, remembering how fair and stately +a city it had been in the days before the plunderer +and the oppressor came. We toiled slowly over +the great, sharp-ridged range which parts the +waters of the Vilcamayo from those of the +Apurimac—the 'Great Speaker'—then, descending +again by the gorge of the river which is +now called the Rio de la Banca, we came to +the long bridge which swings in mid-air from +rock to rock across the chasm through which +the Great Speaker rolls his swift, roaring +flood.</p> + +<p>Its cables were loosened and its floorway +broken, for, like all things else in the land, the +Spaniards had suffered it to fall well nigh to +ruin; and, as I led Joyful Star across it by the +hand, I thought of what it had been in the olden +times, when not a rope or a stick was suffered +to be out of place, and when the Son of the Sun +had been borne across it in his golden travelling +litter, with long processions of his adoring people +going before and behind him, strewing his way +with flowers, and waking the echoes of these +gloomy gorges with the melody of their songs +and laughter.</p> + +<p>From here we journeyed on, ever facing the +setting sun, for two days more, still winding +higher and higher up into the mountains, until +at length, on the third evening, I, riding alone<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> +many yards in front of the others, found the sign +that I was looking for—a rock with three seats +carved on the top of it—and turned my mule +from the track and rode over the rough, stony +ground up the side of the mountain until what +looked from the road a single rock-built peak +opened into two. I beckoned to the others to +follow me, and when they came up I said to the +professor,—</p> + +<p>'Do you know where you are now? Have you +ever been here before?'</p> + +<p>He looked about him and shook his head, +saying,—</p> + +<p>'This may have been the place where we got +off the road when my mule gave out, but I don't +recognise it. Do you mean that we are near the +valley?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said. 'Do you not remember seeing +yonder two peaks from the shore of the lake +near where you found me?'</p> + +<p>He looked at them for a moment, and then +said,—</p> + +<p>'Yes, I remember them; but they don't look +the same, and I don't believe I could find my +way back into the valley from here to save my +life. It's very strange how I can have forgotten +it so completely.'</p> + +<p>I smiled as he said this, knowing that I had +brought them purposely many miles out of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> +way by which he had found the valley by +accident, for I had no desire that the way should +be known to any but myself and those I had +chosen from among the remnant of the Children +of the Blood. Then I bade them follow me +again, and once more rode on alone ahead, for, +as you may well believe, I was too full of my +own thoughts and hopes and fears to be in any +mood for conversation, even with Joyful Star herself. +They, too, talked but little, and as we rode +on in the deepening gloom amid the solemn +silence and the gaunt grandeur of the mountains, +their words became fewer and fewer, till at length +thought took the place of speech, and the silence +was broken by no sound save the patter of the +mules' feet and the rattle of stones under their +iron-shod hoofs.</p> + +<p>Hour after hour I led them on, turning from +valley to valley on the road that was visible only +to my own eyes, and ever rising higher and higher +towards the twin peaks that now stood out dark +and sharp against the starry sky. At last, when +our watches were nearly marking ten o'clock, I +stopped before a cliff covered with bushes and +creeping grasses, and calling Tupac to me, I +bade him seek for an opening under these.</p> + +<p>He groped about among the bushes for a while, +and then suddenly, with a short cry of surprise, +he vanished, as it seemed, through the face of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> +rock itself. I dismounted and followed him, and +found him standing behind the bushes, facing a +square doorway cut in the rock and lined with +masonry. Behind it, and closing it completely, +was a great slab of dressed stone. Down the +sides of the doorway were two square pillars of +stone, and in the middle of one, to the left hand, +three little lines had been cut about a finger's +breadth apart, but so faintly that only one who +knew they were there could find them.</p> + +<p>I stretched a string across from the middle one +of these to the right-hand pillar, and where the +string ended in the centre of the pillar I felt with +my finger-tips and found a little circle about as +big round as an English two-shilling piece. Tupac +had in his hand the iron rod that I had used on +the Rodadero. I took it from him, and, pressing +the end against the circle, told him to push with +me, and, to his wonder, the rod sank, seemingly, +into the solid stone, forcing out a bolt which had +been fitted so cunningly into the pillar that the +end of it looked no more than a circle traced on +the face of it.</p> + +<p>When we had pushed the rod in about six inches +I bade Tupac help me to pull it round towards the +door. The pillar turned on a central hinge as we +did so, and the great stone slab swung back by its +own weight, which we had thus released, opening +the entrance to a tunnel high enough for a man<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span> +to walk through erect. This tunnel sloped somewhat +sharply upwards, and looking up it I could +see, shining in the clear sky beyond the upper +entrance, the stars that I knew were reflected in +the still waters of the little lake by which Golden +Star was sleeping the sleep out of which we had +come to wake her.</p> + +<p>As the passage was not large enough for the +mules to go through with their burdens, I bade +my men unload them and carry their loads +through into the valley. Then we followed, leading +our own animals by the bridle, and after us +the cargo-mules were driven through. The load +of one of them was a long, narrow case of wood +like that in which the professor had taken my +own dead body to London, but this was thickly +and softly padded inside with wool, and lined +with white linen, and at one end was a little +pillow of the softest down, on which the head of +Golden Star would soon be resting.</p> + +<p>As soon as we were all standing outside the +upper mouth of the tunnel I looked at Joyful Star +and said,—</p> + +<p>'Is not this a fitting resting-place even for the +daughter of kings? Are not the stars bright in +the heavens and on the bosom of the lake? Are +not the mountains great, and strong, and silent? +Do they not guard her couch well, and does not +the snowy peak of Umantai yonder point the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span> +straight way to the Mansions of the Sun, where +the soul of Golden Star is even now waiting for +the arts of your brother to call it back to earth +as he called mine?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' she said, looking about her, first at the +stars and then at the vast shapes of the mountains +which loomed huge and dim on every side. 'Yes, +Vilcaroya, it is a good place for sleep, but—is not +the world beyond a good place to wake in? Have +<i>you</i> not found it so?'</p> + +<p>I caught the gleam of her eyes in the starlight +as she looked towards me saying this, and, by the +glory of the Sun, had we stood alone where we +were, I might have forgotten all save the knowledge +that I was the lawful lord of all this land, +and that she was there in the midst of it with +me. For the instant I had gone back to my old +life, with all its old-world thoughts and customs, +and then, before I could answer her, my dreaming +soul was called back to the present by the +cold, quiet voice of her brother saying,—</p> + +<p>'I don't think that very many would find +the world an unpleasant place to wake in, +either for the first or second time, if they could +also wake up lord of illimitable treasures as +Vilcaroya here has done. But come, Your +Highness, and you, professor, it is getting late. +Don't you think it is time to be thinking about +camping?'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span></p> + +<p>The matter-of-fact words scattered my dreams +in an instant, and I woke from them into the +present. I bade Tupac have the animals tethered +and fed, and the tents we had brought with us +pitched in the most sheltered place he could find; +and while they were doing this, and Djama and +the others were busy seeing that the work was +done to their satisfaction, I went to Ruth and said—my +words, which I strove so hard to keep steady, +trembling with I know not how many mingled +passions,—</p> + +<p>'Will Joyful Star come with me and see the +place where her sister and mine is lying, waiting +to come forth and greet her?'</p> + +<p>'Your sister, Vilcaroya?' she said, turning her face +up to me so that the starlight shone upon its fairness +and lost itself in the lustrous depths of her +eyes. 'Do you mean your sister only—not—your—'</p> + +<p>'No,' I said, 'not my wife, for I have thought +upon your words and pondered them deeply; +and though they wounded me sorely at first, +yet now I see that they were wise and just, like +all the other words that Joyful Star has spoken +to me. I have learned that lesson, like many +others which you have taught me. That bridal of +ours is already to me a dream of the long-lost +past, the vision of a time that is dead and a +people that is no more. When Golden Star +wakes, if she ever does, I will greet her as a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> +sister and a friend, as one of my own people +who has come back to me out of my own +times, and she shall help me in the work that +I swore with her to do—but that is all; and I +will find others of the Blood who shall sit upon +the restored throne of my ancestors, and be the +parents of the generations of Incas that shall +come after me.'</p> + +<p>'What do you mean, Vilcaroya?' she said, +in a voice that was half angry and half fearful. +'Do you mean—no, I cannot say it—for I am +sure you do not mean that.'</p> + +<p>'How could that be?' I answered, guessing +her meaning. 'Is it not <i>you</i> who have taught +me the ways and thoughts of the world into +which I have come back? No, what I mean +is that I am not the only one now alive in +whose veins the old blood of the Incas flows. +Tupac, yonder, is the son of the son of the son of +that Tupac-Amaru who died torn asunder in the +square of Cuzco, because he had dared to raise +the Rainbow Banner in the Land of the Four +Regions, and called the Children of the Sun +to revolt against their oppressors. He, more +blessed than I who am his lord, has both wife +and child, and if the prophecy is to be fulfiled, +and I am to reign in the City of the Sun, then +I will take his firstborn and instruct him in all +the lore of our people and the duties of their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> +ruler, and if he proves worthy he shall wear +the Llautu after me.'</p> + +<p>She looked up at me again as I ceased speaking, +just one swift, bright glance that seemed to pierce +to the most secret depths of my soul, and read +the unuttered thoughts that were hidden there, +thoughts which I did not dare to speak even +to myself in the loneliest hour of my musings. +Then she looked down again, and side by side +we walked in silence round the shore of the lake +until I stopped in front of a great black cliff +that jutted out from the mountain side and hung +impending over the dark, still waters of the lake. +I pointed into the black shadows in which its +base was hidden, and said,—</p> + +<p>'There lies Golden Star, and there I lay beside +her through all the long years that were to pass +from the night when I pledged my troth with +her before the Altar of the Sun until this night +when I stand with you, Joyful Star, a new being +in a new world, before her resting-place.'</p> + +<p>'Is it really true?' she said, stopping as she +spoke, and staring straight before her into the +darkness. 'Is it really true that you, who are +standing alive and strong here beside me, lay +there under that great rock for all those years, +while ten generations of men and women were +born, and lived and died, and the whole world +changed again and again? And is the Golden<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> +Star lying in there now really the Golden Star +you have told me so much of, and I have thought +about until she seems to me more like some +living friend that I have known and loved, than +a dead body that has been in the grave for more +than three hundred years? Is it really true, +Vilcaroya, or have we all only been dreaming +some wild dream, like that Frankenstein story +that I was telling you the other day?'</p> + +<p>As she spoke she laid her hand for a moment +upon my arm, as though to satisfy herself that +I was really made of human flesh and blood, +and not a phantom standing beside her in the +starlit darkness.</p> + +<p>Scarce knowing what I did, I laid my own +hand, warm and strong and firm, upon hers. For +an instant I felt it tremble beneath mine. I +would have given all the boundless wealth that +I knew was mine for the courage to close upon +it a grasp that it could not have escaped if it +would. My heart seemed to swell as though +it would burst in my breast, my tingling blood +ran fire, and wild words rose choking to my +lips. Then her hand slipped away from under +mine. Once more I saw her eyes shine in the +starlight, and then I knew that I had learned +the last and greatest lesson that Joyful Star +could teach me.</p> + +<p>I knew now why to think of Golden Star as<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> +my wife and my queen, filled me with the same +untold horror which I had heard that night thrill +in the tones of her who stood beside me, for +now I—the son of a lost race and a long-past +age—loved this daughter of the new time. For +good or evil, for hope or despair, I was hers +until I went again, and for the last time, into +the shadows through which I had already passed, +and then—yes, there he was, this tall, stalwart, +golden-haired son of her own race and her own +time, whose eyes I had seen looking love into +hers!</p> + +<p>He was coming towards us round the lake +with his long, easy, swinging strides, this man +who was already my friend, and who would +one day be the captain of my armies. For one +blind moment of madness I thought how completely +I had him and the others in my power; +of the lonely, unknown valley where we stood; +of the men who were already my slaves, and who +looked upon me as a god. I thought, too, of +the dark, deep waters of the lake, and the secrets +that they held for me alone. How well they +could hide others for me, too! What if Golden +Star never awoke? Would she not be as well +lying there in the peace of her endless sleep +as coming back into the world, perhaps to love +in vain and to suffer as I was doomed to suffer?</p> + +<p>The shadowy forms of the mountains began<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span> +to waver and reel around me; the stars danced +up and down in the sky, and a red mist seemed to +swim before my eyes. Then, through the hoarse, +dull murmur that was sounding in my ears, I +heard the sweet, low voice of Joyful Star saying,—</p> + +<p>'Ah, Captain Hartness, I suppose you have +been wondering what had become of us! I am +afraid I have been neglecting my household +duties, and you have been attending to them +for me, but really I could not resist coming here +with Vilcaroya. Look, that is where Golden Star +is lying, in a cave under that great rock down +there where those dark shadows are. Doesn't +it look cold and lonely and eerie?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' he answered, with a laugh that did not +sound to me like his own. 'But I don't suppose +that matters very much now to Her Highness +any more than it did to Vilcaroya. But, to +descend to less romantic matters, I have come +to tell you that the affairs of our temporary +household are already in order, supper is ready, +and we are all ravenously hungry, and I suppose +you are about the same. This mountain air puts +an edge on one's appetite like a razor's.'</p> + +<p>'Supper—yes, I had forgotten all about it, +thinking of poor Golden Star lying there all alone +in the darkness. Of course, I am desperately +hungry, now that you remind me of it. Come, +Vilcaroya, I am sure you are hungry too. Another<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span> +night alone won't matter much to poor Golden +Star after all these years. You can dream of her +to-night, as I suppose we all shall, and to-morrow +we shall see her. Oh, how I wonder what she will +be really like!'</p> + +<p>As Joyful Star said this in a voice that was half +sad and half merry, she turned away towards +Francis Hartness, and I followed her with some +light words on my lips and many heavy thoughts +in my heart, and we walked together to the tents, +talking of the things that were to be done on the +morrow.</p> + +<p>The next morning I was afoot before the stars +had begun to pale in the coming dawn. I had +not slept for two hours together through the +night, yet, waking and sleeping, many dreams had +come to me. I had been back to the past among +my people, living again that strange old life, with +all its light and colour and gaiety, which was now +every day becoming more and more like a vision +that had been told to me by some other dreamer.</p> + +<p>I had talked with Golden Star, seeking to teach +her the lesson that my dear instructress of the +new time had taught me, and had awakened half +mad with the perplexities of my divided love—the +love of the past that was dead and of the present +that was alive. I had seen my sister-bride come +forth out of her tomb to greet me, clothed in her +bridal robes, with the dust of the grave in her hair<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span> +and on her face. I had clasped her in my longing +arms and kissed the dust from her lips, and while +I yet held her in my embrace her form had grown +cold and stiff again. Then, in the agony of my +sorrow, I had strained her to my breast, and, +under the pressure of my arms, she had crumbled +in my grasp and fallen, a little heap of grey bones +and dusty garments, at my feet.</p> + +<p>Once more I had awakened with my gasping +cry of horror still sounding in my ears, and then, +not daring to seek sleep again, I had risen and +gone out to watch for the rest of the night before +her grave under the rock. There they found me +when they came from the camp at daybreak. I +went back with them, and our hasty morning meal +was eaten and drunk almost in silence, for we were +all too busy with our thoughts to have leisure for +conversation, and my friends, knowing how much +that day's work must mean to me, respected my +unspoken feelings, and left me to the silent +company of my own hopes and fears.</p> + +<p>Breakfast over, we took our lanterns and tools +and went to the rock, followed by Tupac and two +of my men carrying the coffin-like case in which +Golden Star's body was to be laid. Under the +rock was a long heap of loose stones which the +professor had wisely piled up in front of the +upright courses of masonry through which he had +broken into my resting-place. He scanned them<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span> +eagerly to see if they had been disturbed since his +visit, and told us that they had not. Then I bade +Tupac and the men clear them away, which they +speedily did, laying bare the courses of stone +behind them, still standing as the professor had +re-built them after taking out my body.</p> + +<p>A few minutes' more work opened a passage +large enough for a man to walk in, stooping. As +if by a common instinct they all stepped aside and +looked at me. I saw what they meant, and, +turning the light of my lantern into the entrance, +I walked back, a living man, into the grave where +I had lain dead while ten generations of men had +lived and died. I saw the place where I had lain, +for a few mouldering scraps and shreds of cloth +and furs still lay where my bed had been. Then +I flashed my lantern round the walls of the cavern, +and on the side along which my own couch had +been spread by Anda-Huillac and his brother +priests I found what they had told me to seek +while I was preparing to fulfil the oath that I had +sworn with Golden Star.</p> + +<p>It was a wedge of stone fitted in to a crevice in +the wall and left rough and jagged at its outer +end, so that one who did not know its true purpose +would have taken it to be nothing more than a +natural projection in the rough side of the cavern.</p> + +<p>With a mallet that I had brought with me I +struck the end of the wedge softly above and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span> +below until it was loosened in its socket. Then, +standing to one side, I struck it harder. It +dropped from its place, and the same instant a +part of the cavern wall swayed outwards and fell +with a rumbling crash across the floor.</p> + +<p>For a moment I stood breathless and motionless +on the threshold of Golden Star's grave. Then, +with trembling hands, I turned the light of my +lantern into the inner chamber, and as the dust +that the falling stone had raised fell slowly back +to the ground I saw through the particles dancing +in the lantern rays the dim outline of a human +form lying on a couch of skins.</p> + +<p>Still, not daring to set a foot within that sacred +place, I stood in the doorway and let the light +fall full upon the figure. A glance showed me +that so far all was well. No profaning hand had +disturbed the peace and sanctity of her long +slumber. She lay there as perfect in form and +feature as she had lain beside me that night in +the little chamber in the Sanctuary of the Sun.</p> + +<p>Then I thought of Joyful Star. Hers should +be the first eyes after mine to look upon that dead +loveliness. So I turned and went out to where +they were all standing round the outer entrance, +and, taking no notice of the others, replying +nothing to their half-whispered questions, I went +to Ruth and, holding out my hand for her, said,—</p> + +<p>'Come, Joyful Star, and see the sister that the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span> +Lord of Life made long ago in the image that +you now wear.'</p> + +<p>She said nothing, but, with a look of wondering +question, put her hand into mine and I turned to +lead her to the entrance.</p> + +<p>Djama, with a sudden exclamation, took a step +forward as though he would stop her, but Francis +Hartness put his hand on his shoulder, saying,—</p> + +<p>'I think you had better let them go alone. +There is no fear for your sister with all of us +here so near; and if what Vilcaroya says is true, +why should she not see her first?'</p> + +<p>Djama drew back, though with no very good +grace, and I went into the inner chamber, helping +Ruth over the fallen stones. Then I flashed my +light on Golden Star's face and said,—</p> + +<p>'Did I not tell you truly that the Lord of Life +made her in the same image as yours?'</p> + +<p>I heard her utter a little gasping cry of wonder, +and then I saw her slip forward on to her knees +beside Golden Star's pillow, and as the light fell +upon the two faces—the living and the dead—the +likeness between them was so perfect, save for +the golden gleam of Joyful Star's hair and the +lustrous blackness of the tresses that framed my +dead love's face, that they seemed to me as +sisters, one watching over the slumbers of the +other.</p> + +<p>'It is more than wonderful, and it is surely more<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span> +than chance!' said Joyful Star, in a tone that +was almost a whisper, and turning towards me +her white face and the eyes into which the loving +tears of pity were already springing. 'Why did +you not tell me of this before, Vilcaroya?'</p> + +<p>'Because,' I said, 'the arts of the priests might +not have done for her what they did for me, and +I might have found here that which your eyes +should never have looked upon. But now—is she +not beautiful, even as you are?'</p> + +<p>The bright blood came swiftly back into her +cheeks as I said this, and, without answering me +she stooped, and with gentle hands put back the +tresses from Golden Star's forehead, and, bending +over her, laid her warm, sweet lips on the cold, +smooth brow that I had last seen crowned with +the marriage-garland in our bridal chamber in +the Sanctuary.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER V</h3> + +<h3>HOW DJAMA DID HIS WORK</h3> + + +<p>I can tell you but little of what followed the +taking of the body of Golden Star back to the +hacienda, for neither I nor any of the others, +save only Djama himself, witnessed the secret +mysteries of his strange and fearful art. I could +tell you of their wonder when, after I had bidden +Tupac bring the case into the cavern and he +and I and Joyful Star had gently and reverently +raised her from her couch and laid her in it, we +carried her out into the daylight. How they +stood around the open case and looked, half in +wonder and half in fear, from her dead, cold face +to the living likeness that was bending over it. +How they praised her beauty and marvelled at +the forgotten arts that had preserved so perfect +a likeness of life in one who for more than three +centuries and a half had neither drawn breath +nor known a thrill of feeling.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p> + +<p>I could tell you, too, with what loving and +anxious care that precious burden was borne over +plain and valley and mountain in a litter that we +had brought with us for the purpose, and how at +last we laid her in all her calm, unconscious loveliness +on the great table which stood in the middle +of the chamber in which Djama was to do his +work. But here my story must cease for the time, +for Djama made it an unalterable condition that +he should do the work that only he could do +in absolute solitude. Only thus, he said, would +he, or could he, perform the task upon whose +issue the completion of Golden Star's life on earth, +if it was ever to be completed, depended.</p> + +<p>He told us plainly that a single interruption +should be fatal to her and all our hopes. He +would not even permit his sister to enter the +room until he should call for her. I was bitterly +loath to yield—to leave her who had been so dear +to me powerless and unconscious in the hands of +a man whom I had already learned to hate, +although not only did I owe my own new life +to him, but on him alone rested all my hopes of +seeing Golden Star once more restored to life and +health, and the beauty that had been peerless ages +before Joyful Star had reached the perfection of +her young womanhood.</p> + +<p>How did I know what unholy arts he might +use to rekindle the long-quenched life-flame in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> +that fair shape of hers? How could I do more +than guess vaguely and fearfully at the awful +mysteries that might be enacted in the silence +and solitude of that fast-closed chamber in which, +day and night, he would remain alone with her, +the living with the dead, like the potter with his +clay, until it should please him to use the dreadful +power that was his, and call her back from death +to life, perhaps—and oh! how horrible the thought +was to me!—to be the slave of the man who, +by his unearthly art, had made himself the master +of her new life.</p> + +<p>Yet, think of it, brood over it as I would, there +was no help for it. He, and he alone, could exert +the power that would loose the bonds of death +in which she lay enchained. Unless he had his +will she would remain as she was, perhaps until +the Last Day came, and the Lord of Life called +all his children, living and dead, back to the +Mansions of the Sun; and so we yielded, since +there was nothing else to be done.</p> + +<p>On the evening of the day that we returned +to the hacienda, he busied himself making the +last preparations for his work. Then he came out +of the room and locked the door, and, after eating +his dinner almost in silence, went to bed, taking +the key with him, and telling us that on no +account must he be awakened. All that night +and the next day and the next night we neither<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> +saw nor heard anything of him; but on the morning +of the second day, the door of his bedroom was +open and his bed was empty, but the door of +the room in which Golden Star lay was still +fast shut and locked.</p> + +<p>How the time passed I cannot tell you. Joyful +Star, seemingly more self-possessed than any of +us, took up her household duties, and went about +them with a quick, quiet industry that surprised +and shamed us. But we three men wandered +about aimlessly, now alone and now together, +communing with our own thoughts or talking +with each other always of the same thing—of +what was going on in that chamber, where, as +we knew from the faint sounds that every now +and then came through the closed door, the +master of the arts of life and death was performing +his awful task.</p> + +<p>The first day and night came and went, then +the second, and still the door remained closed, +and Djama gave no sign. But the professor +sought to comfort me and soothe our impatience +by telling me how long the same work had lasted +before I was recalled to life. I had sought also +to distract my thoughts by talking with him and +Francis Hartness of all that was to be done for +the deliverance of my people, and the realisation +of my dreams of empire when Djama's task should +be over.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span></p> + +<p>But it was useless, for fear and suspense kept +my mind bound as though with invisible chains, +and, do what I would, my thoughts went back +and back again to dwell upon the unknown secrets +of that closed and silent room. Then I tried to +draw Joyful Star into conversation about the +thoughts which I knew were filling both our +hearts; but though she listened to me she would +say nothing herself, and I soon saw that with +her the subject was forbidden, and the work not +to be talked of till, in success or failure, it was +ended.</p> + +<p>For the first two nights no sleep came to my +eyes, but the third night my weariness was too +much for me, and scarcely had my aching head +fallen on the pillow than slumber, filled with +broken dreams and visions of things unutterably +horrible, came upon me. In the midst of one +of them—I know not what it was, save that no +human words could paint the horror of it—I +woke up with a cold, damp hand upon my shoulder, +and heard Djama's voice, hoarse and trembling, +saying to me,—</p> + +<p>'Get up and dress, Vilcaroya; I have something +for you to see and to hear. Make haste, for there +is not much time to be lost.'</p> + +<p>I looked up, and saw him standing by my bed +with a light in his hand, ghastly pale, and staring +at me with black, burning eyes, which seemed,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span> +as they looked into mine, to take my will a +prisoner, and draw my very soul towards him.</p> + +<p>'What is it?' I said, in the broken words of +one just roused from sleep. 'Is it over—have +you succeeded? Is she alive? Have you come +to take me to her?'</p> + +<p>'The work is not done yet,' he said. 'I have +come for you to see it finished. Make haste, +I tell you, if you want to see what you have +been waiting so long for.'</p> + +<p>I needed no second bidding. I sprang out of +bed, and dressed myself with swift, though +trembling, hands. Then I thrust my feet into a +pair of soft slippers, such as Djama himself wore, +and then I followed him from the room out on +to the balcony that was built round the house +over the inner courtyard. We went down into +the court and into the dining-room, and through +that down a long, narrow passage out of which +opened the room that had held all our hope +and fear and wonder for so long.</p> + +<p>He unlocked the door, and motioned to me +to go in. He followed me, and locked the door +behind us. I looked about the room, which was +dimly lit by two shaded lamps. The table on which +we had laid Golden Star was empty. Many +strangely-shaped things, that I knew not the use +of were scattered about. The air was hot and +moist, and filled with a faint, sweet odour. At<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span> +the opposite end from the door, which was covered +by a screen, I saw in one corner a bath—from +which white, steamy fumes were rising—and in +the other stood a little, narrow, curtained bed, +such as I had first awakened in.</p> + +<p>Djama caught me by the arm, and half led, +half dragged me to the bedside. Then with his +other hand he parted the curtains and pointed +to the pillow. I felt his burning eyes fixed upon +me as I looked and saw the sweet fair face of +Golden Star lying in the midst of her dusky +tresses, which lay spread out on the pillow, +cleansed from the dust of the grave, and soft +and shimmering as silk.</p> + +<p>I started forward, and, with my face close to +hers, scanned every feature, and listened, but in +vain, for the soft sound of her breathing. Her +skin was clear and moist; I could see the thin, +blue veins in her eyelids, and the moisture on her +lips. I laid my hand gently on her cheek. It +was soft and smooth, but still cold as death.</p> + +<p>Then a fierce, unreasoning anger came into my +heart. I sprang back and seized Djama by the +shoulders, and, looking with fierce, hot eyes into +his, I whispered hoarsely,—</p> + +<p>'Have you brought me here to mock me? She +is not alive—she is but a fair image of death. +Tell me that you have failed and I will strangle +you, liar and cheat that you are!'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span></p> + +<p>He looked back steadily into my eyes and +smiled, and said, in a voice that had not the +slightest tremor of fear,—</p> + +<p>'If I fail you may strangle me, and welcome; +but I have not failed yet, Vilcaroya. It is for +<i>you</i> to say now whether Golden Star is to +awake or not.'</p> + +<p>'What do you mean?' I said, letting go my +grip on his shoulders, and recoiling a pace from +him.</p> + +<p>'You shall hear what I mean,' he said. 'But +you must hear patiently and quietly, and think +well on what I say, for in your answer to what I +ask you will also answer the question whether +Golden Star is to awake to life and health, or to +be put back in that case yonder and buried, to rot +away into corruption like any other corpse.'</p> + +<p>'Say on, I am listening,' I said. My lips were +dry, and the grip of a deadly fear seemed to be +clutching at my heart and draining the last drop +of blood from it.</p> + +<p>'Listen well, then,' he said. He paused for a +moment as though to collect his thoughts, and +make words ready to express them. Then he +went on. 'You see, I have undone the work +that your priests did three hundred and sixty +years ago. Your Golden Star is now neither +dead nor alive. She is lying on the narrow +borderland that divides life from death, and for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> +an hour from the time I left this room she will +remain there—if I choose. At the end of that +time she will pass beyond the border, and no +earthly power, not even mine, could call her back. +But at any time before the hour has expired I +can complete the work that I have begun. I can +bring the breath back to her body; I can set the +blood flowing through her veins. You shall see +her eyes open and her lips smile, and you shall +hear her speak to you as though she had only +awakened out of sleep. This I can do, and I +will, if you will do what I am going to ask +you.'</p> + +<p>'What is it?' I whispered. 'Tell me quickly +that I may know. You are master here. I can +only listen and obey.'</p> + +<p>He smiled as I said this, a smile that it was +not good for an honest man to look upon, and +went on, speaking now rapidly and earnestly,—</p> + +<p>'When I did this work for you, I did it as a +student and a man of science, who was making +the greatest experiment of his life. I believed +that I had solved one, at least, of the secrets of +life and death. I watched and noted every change +that came over you. I marked every symptom +and measured every step of your return from +death into life, but I did all this as a student +inquiring into the mysteries of Nature, as an +observer watching the working out of a great<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> +problem, and with no more feeling than if I had +been dissecting a corpse. But this time it has +been different. I began this work with the cold +and passionless deliberation of one who toils only +to learn and to succeed. But afterwards—come +here and look at her, and you will understand +me better. She is a woman, and she is beautiful, +and here, for two days and two nights, she has +lain under my hands and my eyes. I have given +her beauty back to her, and if that beauty is to +live it must be mine. Do you understand me, +Vilcaroya?'</p> + +<p>What could I say, what could I do to answer +this man whom I hated, and yet who held the +power of life and death for Golden Star in his +hands? The vague fear that had smitten me +when he began to speak had taken its worst +shape now. I looked at him with hate and horror +staring out of my eyes. Again and again I tried +to speak, but my lips only moved and trembled +without making any word. But he read my +thoughts, and smiled that evil smile of his again +and said, in a low voice which seemed to have the +echo of a laugh in it,—</p> + +<p>'I see you hate me, as I have often thought +you did, and that is why I have brought you +here to tell you this. That is why I would not +complete my work till you had sworn, as you yet +shall do if you would see Golden Star alive again,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span> +that what I have brought back out of the grave +shall be mine and mine only.'</p> + +<p>These last words of his let loose my anger and +unchained my tongue. I gripped him by the +arm, and in a whisper that had a strange hissing +sound, I said,—</p> + +<p>'But that is <i>not</i> all! What do you think your +life would be worth if you left her to die? Have +you forgotten what I said to you in the cave +beneath the Rodadero? Do you not know that +this very night I could have you carried, gagged +and bound, over the mountains and back to the +grave that we took Golden Star out of? Do you +not know that I could lay you there with food and +drink beside you that you could not touch, and a +lamp whose light would show them to you, and +then wall up the entrance again, and leave you +there to think of your fate till you went mad and +died of hunger and thirst? Do you not know that +I could chain you to a rock and light a fire about +you, and watch you burn limb by limb till you +shrieked your life out in lingering agony? Would +this be better than going back to your own land +loaded with treasure that would make you richer +than you have ever dreamed of being? Now, <i>I</i> +have spoken, and it is for you to answer me.'</p> + +<p>Before I had done speaking he had taken a +chair and seated himself astride it, with his arms +resting on the back and his chin on his arms, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span> +was looking at me with white, set face, and steady, +dark, shining eyes. When I had finished there +was a little silence between us, and then he spoke, +and the first time I ever felt fear in either of my +lives was when I heard those cold, cruel, carefully-measured +words of his,—</p> + +<p>'That is well said, Vilcaroya. I am glad you +have spoken plainly, for now we understand each +other; but I don't think you quite realise the +difference between your power and mine. You +have, or think you have, the brute force, the +strength of numbers, and the slavish devotion of +your people on your side, and you threaten to +use that power to put me to a lingering and +torturing death unless I withdraw my demands +and do as you wish me. In that, however, you +are quite wrong. I am as much the master of +my own life as I was once of yours, and still am +of Golden Star's. Without moving hand or foot +I could kill myself as I sit here before you, so +your threats of torture are nothing more than +empty words. It is only a matter of simple life +or death. If I live, Golden Star will live. If I +die, she will never draw the breath of life—but +what I have said, I have said. She shall only +live as my promised wife, bound to me by the +most sacred oath that you can swear. You cannot +consummate your own marriage with her, +because in the modern world that is impossible.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span> +You are refusing simply because, for some reason +or other, you dislike me personally, but I don't +propose that that shall stand in my way. As +for your treasures, their value has utterly changed +for me. A week ago, I frankly confess that I +would have sold my soul, if I thought I had one, +for them. Now, without her, they would only +make the world a golden mockery to me, for I +tell you, Vilcaroya, that I, who have never loved +living woman yet, love that beautiful shape of +inanimate flesh as that old sculptor we have told +you of loved his statue. Every hour that I have +been alone in this room with her this strange +love of mine has grown. First it was only scientific +curiosity, then physical admiration, then +something else. I don't know what it is, for it +is beyond the reach of my analysis, but I know +enough of it to call it love, and I tell you it is +such love as only a man of my nature and pursuits +is capable of. Unsatisfied, it would consume +me and kill me, and I would rather die quickly +than slowly. Now—once more—shall Golden +Star and I live or die?'</p> + +<p>How was I to answer such a speech as this? +I heard him in silence to the end, my eyes held +fast by his, and my spirit sinking as though +beaten down by the pitiless force of those cold +words of his. And in the meantime a great +truth had been dawning in my mind. Force<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> +had ceased to rule in this new world, and intellect +had taken its throne. I was the inferior +of this man, whose trained mind was the heir +of the generations that had toiled and fought +while I had slept. I was little better than a +savage before him, and I knew it, and he knew +it, and, bitter as the thought was to me, yet it +was only the truth. I was conquered, and +a new gleam in his eyes told me that he +had read my thoughts before I had spoken +them.</p> + +<p>Then, while I stood hesitating before him, his +white, hard-set face softened, and his lips melted +into a smile that was almost as sweet as a +woman's. It was that that saved me, for it reminded +me of Ruth, and the recollection of her +told me that I loved even as Djama did. The +very thought of her put new blood into my +heart. The words of yielding and submission +died unuttered on my lips. I raised my head, +which I had bowed down in dejection, and +looked at him steadily again. Then I said +slowly, and in the voice of a man who does not +speak twice,—</p> + +<p>'I have thought, and I will speak for the last +time. I will swear by the sacred glory of the +Lord of Light that Golden Star shall be yours, +upon two conditions.'</p> + +<p>'Conditions!' said he, bringing his dark brows<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span> +down till they made a straight black line over +his eyes. 'What are they?'</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 394px;"><a name="The_dagger-point_dropped_till_it_was_within_an_inch_of_Golden_Stars_breast" id="The_dagger-point_dropped_till_it_was_within_an_inch_of_Golden_Stars_breast"></a> +<img src="images/illus3.jpg" width="394" height="600" alt="The dagger-point dropped till it was within an inch of Golden Star's breast." title="Am I only dreaming that the death-sleep is over?" /> +<span class="caption">The dagger-point dropped till it was within an inch of Golden Star's breast.</span> +</div> + +<p>'These,' I said. 'You love and I love. First, +then, you must win the love of Golden Star, and, +secondly, you must give me your sister, Joyful +Star, if I can win her love.'</p> + +<p>'My sister Ruth to <i>you</i>! Is that your earnest, +Vilcaroya, or are you only trying my patience?'</p> + +<p>The bitter, coldly-spoken words cut into my +soul as the lash of a whip cuts into the flesh. I +could have slain him as he sat there sneering at +me, but it was a time for words, not deeds; and +so, mastering my anger as best I could, I took +two swift strides to Golden Star's bedside, and, +snatching my dagger out of the sheath of the +belt which I had put on when I had dressed, I +turned and faced him, and said,—</p> + +<p>'I am not jesting. As you love I love, and by +the glory and majesty of my Father the Sun I tell +you if you do not say yes I will do with this +dagger what all your art will never repair, and +then, if I must do that, I will kill you too; and +before to-morrow night has passed Joyful Star +shall be with me where none can find her. Now, +what is your answer—yes, or no?'</p> + +<p>He looked at me and then at the dagger hanging +in my hand, point downwards, over the breast +of Golden Star. Then his eyes fell upon the still +loveliness of her face. He knew that if he moved<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span> +the dagger would fall. His face, flushed a moment +before, grew grey and pale again at the sound of +my words, and then I saw that he had not lied +to me when he said that his life would be worthless +without her. Twice, thrice, his lips moved +without shaping a word. Then the words came. +They were dry and broken and trembling, for +in the strength of my own love I had now conquered +my conqueror, and he said,—</p> + +<p>'Yes, since it must be so. My sister for your +sister. Well, I suppose it's a fair exchange. We +hate each other, you and I, but that's an accident +of fate. Take away your dagger. I know when +I am beaten, and I am beaten now. Will you +swear that oath of yours again?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said, 'and you?'</p> + +<p>I still kept the dagger within a span of Golden +Star's heart, for I still had but little trust in his +faith. He rose from his chair, throwing it over as +he did so, and stood up and faced me, saying,—</p> + +<p>'There is no need for oaths either from you or +me. We have both too much to lose to break +faith. Put up your dagger and come away, and +in ten minutes from now you shall hear Golden +Star draw the first breath of her new life, and +see her eyes open and look at you. That would +be worth more than any oath I could swear, +wouldn't it?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said, 'but that is not all or enough. If<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span> +you broke faith with me after that, I should have +to shed blood—my sister's and yours. Now I need +only make her life impossible. I will stop here. +Go you and wake your sister and bring her here. +Then we will say more.'</p> + +<p>'Bring Ruth here!' he cried, staring at me as +though he wished, as no doubt he did, that the +fierce light in his eyes could blast and wither me +where I stood. 'Bring her here to see what no +human eyes but mine have ever seen. Bring her +here to listen to what you have said—and if her, +why not Lamson and Hartness as well?'</p> + +<p>'You may bring all, if you please,' I said, 'but +Joyful Star must come, no matter what she hears +or sees. I have spoken—now go, or Golden Star +shall never wake again.'</p> + +<p>He took a half pace towards me, with clenched +hands and set teeth, crouching like a mountain +lion about to spring on its prey. The dagger +point dropped till it was only an inch from +Golden Star's breast. If he had made another +step I would have driven it home. He read in +my eyes that I would do so, and he stopped. +Then he hissed a curse at me through his clenched +teeth, and turned and walked away towards the +door. As he reached it he looked back, and saw +me still standing there with the dagger ready to +do the work that could never be undone. I +saw his lips move, but heard no sound.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span></p> + +<p>Then he unlocked the door, went out, and +locked it after him, leaving me there alone with +my dead sister-love, whose new life, with all its +possibilities of love and happiness, or hate and +misery, I had thrown into the balance of Fate +in the game that I was playing against him to +win that other love which had now become tenfold +more dear to me.</p> + +<p>When he had gone I took his chair and put it +by the side of the bed and sat down, still holding +my bare dagger in my hand and looking on Golden +Star's dead loveliness, wondering what it would be +like when the sunshine of her new life should shine +upon it, and on whom her first glance would fall, +or whose name be the first that her lips would +speak, and as I sat and watched and waited it +seemed to me as though the ghosts of those long +dead were taking shape and ranging themselves +about the bed of her re-awakening as they had +done about the bed of her falling asleep and +mine.</p> + +<p>I saw Anda-Huillac and his brother priests of +the Sun standing about me, gazing at me and at +her with sad and dreamy eyes, like phantoms of +the past looking upon the realities of the present. +Then the shape of Anda-Huillac seemed to glide +towards me. His ghostly eyes looked into mine, +and a smile of pity and reproach moved his pale +lips. I felt a cold, soft hand laid upon mine, my<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> +grasp relaxed and the dagger fell ringing to the +floor.</p> + +<p>The sound awoke me, and my vision vanished. +How long it had lasted, or whether it was a vision +of sleep or waking, I know not, but I was awake +now for I heard the door creek on its hinges. I +picked the dagger up again and started to my +feet, and, still guarding Golden Star's bed, I +turned and faced Djama as he came in, followed +by the professor and Francis Hartness, with Joyful +Star between them.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER VI</h3> + +<h3>THE WAKING OF GOLDEN STAR</h3> + + +<p>'There is your royal, would-be lover, Ruth! +Come, if you don't believe me, you can hear from +his own lips that upon you, and you alone, depends +Golden Star's return to life. Is not that +so, Your Highness?'</p> + +<p>It was Djama who said this, and as he said +it, he caught Joyful Star by the hand and half +led, half dragged her towards me from between +the other two. But before he had come half the +length of the room, Francis Hartness had overtaken +him in a few swift strides. I saw his hand +fall heavily on his shoulder, and with his other +hand he took Ruth's out of his. His blue eyes +were nearly black with anger, and his bronzed +face was grey and set and pale with the passion +that his strong will was holding back, and his +voice was low and clear, and vibrating like the +sound of a distant bell when he spoke and said,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'I can't stand that, Djama. Are you forgetting +that your sister is a woman, and that +you have brought her into the presence of +the dead?'</p> + +<p>'You must be mad, Laurens!' said Joyful Star, +before her brother could reply. 'Surely this +dreadful work of yours has turned your brain. +Vilcaroya, what does all this mean? Is Golden +Star dead or alive? Ah, how beautiful she is +now! No, surely she cannot be dead!'</p> + +<p>She had broken away from both her brother +and Francis Hartness, and as she said the last +words she was leaning over Golden Star's pillow, +softly stroking her hair; and then she stooped +lower and kissed her forehead. Then the others +came up to the bedside, Francis Hartness and +Djama in front, and the professor standing silent +and wondering behind them.</p> + +<p>'If Djama won't speak, will you, Vilcaroya?' +said Hartness, looking at me with eyes that were +still angry. 'What is that dagger in your hand +for, and what is the meaning of this story that +he has been telling me?'</p> + +<p>'The meaning is of life or death,' I said. +'Laurens Djama will not give Golden Star's +life back to her if I will not swear to give her +to him when she lives again, and I have sworn +that he shall not restore her to life unless he +swears to give Joyful Star to me, for I love<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> +her, and will have neither life nor empire without +her.'</p> + +<p>As I listened to my own voice saying these +bold words, it seemed to me as though another +were speaking, for, even in that hot moment of +passion and desperate resolve, I could scarce believe +them mine. For the instant, I thought +Hartness would have struck me down where I +stood, nor could I have used my dagger against +him, for he was a man and I loved him, though +I saw now that we both loved the same woman. +But before either of us could move, Ruth had +risen erect and come between us, her cheeks +burning with shame and her eyes aglow with +anger.</p> + +<p>'What!' she said, 'Laurens give me to you, +Vilcaroya! Don't you know yet that no one +can give an English girl away except herself, +and that she only gives herself to the man she +chooses of her own free will? Do you think I +am a slave or a human chattel to be bartered +away like that? Nonsense! And you, Captain +Hartness, don't look so fiercely at Vilcaroya. +Remember that he is your friend and mine, or +has been, and has not the same ideas as we +have. If he had—'</p> + +<p>'He has,' I said, breaking in upon her speech, +'since Joyful Star has spoken. He is not her +lover but her slave, and she has shamed him.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span> +I will eat the words that should never have +been spoken. Let Golden Star live! I will +keep my oath and ask nothing in return.'</p> + +<p>So the savage within me was tamed, and I, who +but a few minutes before had been ready to take +two lives at the prompting of a single word, +dropped my dagger and stood with bowed head, +humble as a chidden child before her whose +lightest word was then my most sacred law. I +raised my eyes and looked at her to see if my +words had pleased her. As our eyes met she +gave me a glance that I would have died to +win from her, and then, pushing me and Francis +Hartness gently aside, yet with a force that neither +of us could have resisted, she took her brother by +the arm and, leading him to the bedside with one +hand, she laid the other on Golden Star's brow, +and said,—</p> + +<p>'Laurens, can you really bring her back to life?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' he answered, and I could see that he +did not dare to raise his eyes to hers, 'but—'</p> + +<p>'But you will only do it for a price, you think. +For shame! Is that the way you would use +this terrible power that you possess? Is my +brother so mean a creature as that? You love +her, you say, even as she lies there, neither +dead nor alive? Well, when she lives, she will +be worthy of any man's love, but only of a +man's, Laurens, and you would not be a man,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> +with all your learning and power, if you insisted +on so mean an advantage as your skill gives +you. Do you mean to tell me that you can +look on such a beauty as that, knowing that you +can restore it to life, and yet ask a price before +you will do it? Come, Laurens, that is not +like your old self. Use your power with the +same generosity that it has been given to you, +and then win Golden Star like a man if you +can.'</p> + +<p>Where my strength had been vanquished, her +sweet wisdom conquered. The man who had +laughed at my threats, and told me without a +quiver in his voice how he could, and would, +slay himself rather than I should do what he +knew I could do, stood humbled and abashed +before the righteous and yet gently-spoken reproach +of her who was pleading for the life of +a sister woman.</p> + +<p>I saw Djama's hands meet behind his back, +and his fingers begin to twine about each other. +I saw him look from Ruth to Golden Star, from +the living woman who was his sister to her lifeless +counterpart. Then came over him one of those +swift changes of mood which we had so often seen +before. All the cold cruelty of his long-chained-up +passion vanished. His face, from being stone, +became flesh again. The fierce glitter, as of a +sword's point, died out of his eyes, and they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span> +grew warm and soft again, and his voice was +almost as sweet and gentle as Ruth's, and strangely +like it, too, as he answered her and said,—</p> + +<p>'You are right, Ruth. I was not myself. I +was a brute, unworthy either of love or power. +Let her die! Good God, I would die myself a +thousand times rather than do that! I must have +been out of my senses even to think of such a +crime for a moment, but if you were a man and +had lived through what I have lived through +for the last two days and nights, you would +understand me, and perhaps forgive me. Yes, +she shall live. How could I ever have thought +of letting her die!'</p> + +<p>Then he rose from his half-stooping posture +over the bed, and came to where I stood at +the foot, and, with his hand outstretched and a +smile on his lips, said,—</p> + +<p>'You have heard what I have just said, +Vilcaroya. You have withdrawn your conditions; +now I will take back mine. It is no use for +you and me to be enemies. We have had our +fight, and I confess myself beaten. Now let us +try to be friends for Ruth's sake and Golden +Star's, and I promise you that to-morrow morning +you shall be telling her the story of your +resurrection and her own.'</p> + +<p>For a moment I stared at him in, speechless +wonder, striving to understand how it could be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> +that those eyes, which had, but a short time +before, been glaring hate at me, could now be +looking so kindly and frankly into mine; and +how those lips, which had just been sneering so +coldly and cruelly alike at my love and my +hate, could shape such friendly and honest-sounding +words. Then I looked at Ruth, +asking her with my eyes what she would have +me do, and in instant obedience to what I saw +took Djama's hand in mine and said,—</p> + +<p>'So be it! The evil in our hearts has spoken, +now let the good that is there speak, and let +us be friends; and, when Golden Star awakes, +with my lips she shall bless you and her who +has made peace between us where there was +strife.'</p> + +<p>'Miss Ruth, you really must allow me to +congratulate you on your success as a peacemaker,' +said the professor, speaking now for the +first time since he had come into the room, +and coming forward to where Joyful Star still +stood by the bedside. 'It would have been ten +thousand pities if this—ah—this little affair had +ended any other way, for all of the exquisitely +perfect subjects—'</p> + +<p>'<i>Subjects</i>, professor?' said Ruth, interrupting +him with a laugh. 'Do you venture to call +Golden Star a subject, just as you do those +awful things in your dissecting-rooms? Look at<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span> +her—a <i>subject</i> indeed! Don't call her that +again in my hearing, please!'</p> + +<p>'Oh, ah, of course, I beg your pardon a +thousand times, and Her Highness's too. Really, +I spoke quite thoughtlessly and most improperly.' +he answered, laughing at her mock displeasure, +'And now, Djama, since we have had two +declarations of love and a peacemaking, don't +you think it would be cruel to keep Her Highness +waiting any longer on the threshold of her new +life? Come, Hartness, you and I have no more +business here at present. Don't you think we +had better go and wait somewhere else for +the working of the miracle?'</p> + +<p>'Just what I was going to say,' replied +Hartness, who had gone away a little distance +from the bed while we were talking, and had +been standing by the table, seeming to examine +the strange instruments that were scattered about +it. 'Of course the doctor will wish to finish his +work alone.'</p> + +<p>'May not Vilcaroya and I stay, Laurens?' +asked Joyful Star, looking at him with appealing +eyes. 'You know it will be much better +for her to see another woman by her when she +awakes, and then she will recognise Vilcaroya, +and that will tell her that she is among friends.'</p> + +<p>But Djama shook his head and said,—</p> + +<p>'No, Ruth, not yet. There is something else<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span> +to be done before that—something, well, something +that only a medical man ought to see or +do, and you really must leave me to do it +alone. You forget, it is not merely a matter +of waking. She is not alive yet; but if you will +leave me alone for about half-an-hour, I promise +you that I will call you and Vilcaroya back before +she actually wakes.'</p> + +<p>'Very well,' she said, moving away from +the bedside. 'I don't want to pry into your +mysteries.' Then she turned to me, and said, +with a faint smile on her lips, 'Vilcaroya, come +into the dining-room, I have something to say +to you.'</p> + +<p>She went down the room after the professor +and Francis Hartness, and I followed her with +beating heart and anxious thoughts, wondering +what new lesson it was she was about to +teach me.</p> + +<p>Djama closed and locked the door after us. +She led the way to the dining-room, where +there was a light burning. It was empty, for +the others, hearing what she had said to me, +had gone out into the courtyard. Then she +turned and faced me with her back to the +light; but in spite of that I could see that her +eyes were bright, and her fair face flushed as +she said to me in a low voice that trembled +a little,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Vilcaroya, I am going to forget everything +that was said in the room yonder, and—and +you must forget it too. It was no time or +place for such things to be said, and you and +Laurens were not yourselves when you said +them. If you do not forget them, we cannot +be friends any more. You understand me, +don't you?'</p> + +<p>Gentle and sweetly spoken as the words were, +they fell upon my heart like snow upon a +fainting flame; yet I felt that, like all her +words, they were true and just. I crossed my +hands on my breast with one of my old-world +gestures, and, standing so before her with bowed +head, I said,—</p> + +<p>'The will of Joyful Star is my law. Let +what I spoke in my madness be forgotten as +you have said. Who am I that I should say +such things?—a poor savage that has wandered +from his own world into hers, where he is a +stranger!'</p> + +<p>'No, not a savage, Vilcaroya. You must +never say that word again. How could Golden +Star's brother be a savage? How could I—but +there, we have said enough for the present. +We have other things to think of now.'</p> + +<p>With that she turned away and sat down in +a long, low chair, resting her cheek upon her +hand, and looking out of one of the windows<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span> +at the stars, while I went and stood before +another to look at the same stars that she was +looking at, and so we waited in silence until +the door opened, and we heard Djama's voice +telling us that the long-expected moment of +Golden Star's awakening had come at last.</p> + +<p>As Joyful Star went to the door I stood aside +and waited for her to pass me and go out first. +As she went by our eyes met for a moment, and +I saw that hers were bright with tears. My heart +leapt at the sight, and then fell still again and +well nigh fainting. What had she said to me but +a few minutes before? How dare I dream that +those sweet tears could be for me?</p> + +<p>I followed her and Djama into the room, but +half-way between the door and the bed I stopped, +not daring to go on, held back by some impulse +I could not name. I saw her lean over the pillow +for a moment in silence that for me was breathless. +Then came a soft, sweet sound, and then +a little cry. Was it her's or Golden Star's?</p> + +<p>Djama beckoned to me. I went with swift, +silent steps to the foot of the little bed, and +saw Golden Star's eyes wide open and looking +wonderingly up into Ruth's face, and her red +lips smiling at her. The miracle had been completed. +She had awakened her with a kiss.</p> + +<p>'Come and give her your welcome back to +life, Vilcaroya,' she whispered, rising and turning<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span> +her fair face with its wet cheeks and smiling lips +towards me. I went and stood over the pillow, +and laid my trembling lips on Golden Star's +brow, and then I said, in the words that had +been the first of my own new life,—</p> + +<p>'<i>Cori-Coyllur Ñustallipa, Ñusta mi!</i>'</p> + +<p>She looked at me, but there was no more +recognition in her gaze than in that of a newborn +child, nor was there any answering smile +upon her lips. Unheeding this for the moment, +I went on and said, still speaking very gently +and softly in our own tongue,—</p> + +<p>'Thou art thrice welcome back from the shades +of night into the bright presence of our Father +the Sun, oh, Golden Star! Dost thou not +remember me, Vilcaroya, thy brother, who went +into the darkness with thee long ago, and has +been permitted to return before thee that he +might greet thee and bid thee welcome?'</p> + +<p>Her eyes wandered from my face to Joyful +Star's, and then she smiled again, but no answering +words came from her parted lips. Now, as +we looked from one another to her, a great fear +came into all our hearts, and Ruth gave it +voice.</p> + +<p>'Laurens,' she whispered, laying her hands +upon his arm, 'what is the matter? Vilcaroya +spoke at once, didn't he? Why doesn't she +speak? Oh, surely it can't be that she is—that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span> +she has come back to life without memory or—or +her reason? What is it?'</p> + +<p>I waited for Djama's answer as a man might +wait for words that were to tell him whether he +was to live or die. He put us both gently away +from the bed, and then, laying his hand on +Golden Star's brow, he looked long and steadfastly +into her eyes. It seemed to me as though +Ruth and I could hear each other's hearts beating +and counting off the seconds until he raised his +head again and said in the slow, even tones of +the man of science who, for the time, had overcome +and banished the lover,—</p> + +<p>'Memory, perhaps, even probably; but reason, +no. These are not the eyes of an imbecile or +an idiot, but they <i>are</i> the eyes of a child. It is +possible that when she fully recovers we may +find her mind a perfect blank—a virgin page on +which the story of her new life will have to be +written.'</p> + +<p>'Thank God for that!' she murmured, and I, +too, echoed her words in my heart, though I did +not know then how much she meant by them.</p> + +<p>Then once more she turned and went to Golden +Star's pillow, laying her hand upon her brow +again, and looking fondly for a moment on the +silent and yet eloquent face that was looking up +at her. Then she said to her brother,—</p> + +<p>'But is she well now? I mean, is her physical<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span> +life certain? Will she live and grow well and +strong again?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' he answered. 'I have done everything +that it is in my power to do. I have fulfilled my +promise to His Highness. The rest is, as it was +with him, merely a matter of care and nourishment +and nursing.'</p> + +<p>'Then,' she said, with a swift, subtle change +coming over her manner, 'the care and the +nursing must be mine, and you two must say +good-bye to her for the present, until I have +nursed her back to health. Of course you may +see her when necessary, as her doctor, but only +as her doctor, mind. And you, Vilcaroya, must +possess yourself with what patience you can until +my part of the work is done as well. Now, go +away, both of you. I am mistress here for the +present. Laurens, you go and get ready the +nourishment that you think she should take, and +come back in half-an-hour, and tell me how it +is to be taken.'</p> + +<p>It was easy for us to see the deep yet kindly +meaning of her lightly-spoken words, for in them +she had told us that Golden Star was now once +more a living woman. No longer a mummy, or +a corpse, or a 'subject,' as the professor had +called her—no longer an inanimate thing that +had neither sex nor claim to human rights—but +a sister woman of her own kind whose wants<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span> +could only be supplied by her. So we obeyed +her, and went away, leaving her there to perform +the most sacred task save one that a loving +woman could perform.</p> + +<p>Djama went to prepare the food that Golden +Star would soon need, and I went in search of +the professor and Francis Hartness, and told +them all that had happened, and then, when +the professor had gone to bed to finish his +broken night's rest, I and he who was my rival +in love, and who was to be my brother-in-arms, +went out from the courtyard into the <i>patio</i> +which lay in front of the house, sloping down +towards the entrance of the little valley in which +the hacienda lay, and there, walking to and fro +side by side, we talked long and earnestly of +many things upon the doing of which my heart +was set, and which might now be freely entered +upon, seeing that the first object of our journey +was already achieved.</p> + +<p>Our talk, as you may well believe, was of war +and not of love, though it would be hard to say +which of the two at that hour most filled our +secret thoughts; but, as I have told you, this +English soldier was a true man, and I trusted +him, knowing well that though, when the +imperial Llautu once more encircled my brows, +I might find courage to seek openly the love of +her into whose eyes I had already seen him<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> +look with love, yet no falsehood or hatred could +ever come between us. So I told him freely of +the treasures that I had only to take from their +hiding-places to make them mine, and spoke +once more of the use that I would make of +them, and took his advice as to the best method +of that use.</p> + +<p>This he was well able to give me, for I soon +found that since he had resolved to throw in +his lot with us, he had applied himself diligently +to the task of studying the work that was to be +ours, and seeking the best and readiest means of +doing it. In Lima and Arequipa he had bought +books and papers from which he had learned, +as far as could be learned, the resources and +power of the government of Peru, the number +of its soldiers and their stations, the names and +characters of the men who made the government, +and of those who were opposed to them, seeking, +as he told me was now ever the case in +the countries of South America, to overturn +the government and to take for themselves the +honours and the profits of rule.</p> + +<p>He told me—which events soon proved to be +the truth—that not many months would pass by +before civil war once more broke out. The +President and the ministers, who were the tools +of his tyranny, had oppressed the people with +grievous burdens till they could endure them no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span> +longer, and already people in the towns of the +interior were refusing to pay taxes, and were +arming themselves in secret and meeting in bands +among the mountains to practise themselves with +their weapons, and make ready for the war which +was so soon to come.</p> + +<p>All this, as he soon showed me, was happening +as though the Fates which rule the world +had especially prepared it for my coming. The +people had no leader save a man who had been +himself a tyrant before, and none trusted him, but +looked to him only to serve their own ends. +Those who had the power were hated, and those +who sought to seize it were distrusted.</p> + +<p>But better than all was the utter, and, as far as +all men, save ourselves, could see, the hopeless +poverty of the country. Long years of plundering +had emptied the treasury. Commerce was leaving +the shores, and industries were languishing throughout +the land. No man trusted his neighbour, for +nearly all were in debt, and none could get paid, +and my own people, the slaves of the children +of the Spaniards, and the sport of their blind +and brutal jesting, had borne their heavy burdens +till their backs were sore, sore as their patient +hearts were, and they would bear them no +longer.</p> + +<p>From the country which is called Ecuador, +and which in my other life had been Quito,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span> +the kingdom of Atahuallpa, to the southern +confines of Bolivia, which had once been part +of the Land of the Four Regions, the dominions +of my own father, all were ready to throw down +their long-borne burdens and turn and rend their +oppressors and those whose fathers had robbed +them of the land that had once been theirs.</p> + +<p>I well remember the very words in which +Francis Hartness told me all this at much +greater length than I have set it down here; +and this is what he said when, as the stars were +paling in the sky above us and the eastern +mountains were beginning to stand out sharply +against the growing light of the coming dawn, +our long talk drew to its close,—</p> + +<p>'In short, Vilcaroya, if I were given to that +sort of thing, I could believe that the very Fates +themselves had conspired to prepare the way +for you. You have come back to the world +and to your own country at the very moment +that these miserable wretches are getting ready +to tear each other to pieces. The government +is as hopeless as it is impossible, and the popular +party, as they call themselves, have neither a +leader that they can trust, nor money to buy +weapons and pay their soldiers with. The +treasury is empty, for, so to speak, almost +the last dollar had been stolen. The native +troops have had no regular pay for months, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span> +I believe they would desert to a regiment if they +once believed that you are what you are, and +that you possess, as you do, the means of paying +them well and honestly for their help.</p> + +<p>'And, after all, I don't know that even I, as a +soldier, could call it desertion under such circumstances. +You are of their own blood, the son of +one of their ancient kings. These people, these +Peruvians, are only mongrel descendants of those +who have plundered and oppressed them for +centuries. They owe them no allegiance that is +worth the name; but you they would hail, not +only as their lawful king, but almost as a god—as, +indeed, they could well be pardoned for doing, +seeing what a marvellous fate yours has been.</p> + +<p>'The only thing to do at present, and the +only thing in which I see any difficulty, is to +get into communication with them in such a way +that they shall come to know you without the +authorities knowing anything about you or your +treasures. If that could be done, I think all +the rest would be easy, and then I believe that +the moment you raised the flag of the old Incas, +they would flock to it in thousands, and after +that it would only be a matter of military +management and leadership.'</p> + +<p>'And if I will charge myself with that, my +friend,' I said, as he paused for a moment; 'if I +will promise you that before six more suns have<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span> +risen and set, the news of my coming shall be +spread far and wide through the land, and yet in +such a manner that none but the faithful, the +Children of the Blood themselves, shall know anything +that could work us harm, will you give me +the help of your skill and your knowledge of the +arts of this new warfare which is so strange to me? +Will you lead my armies to battle against the +oppressors of my people? Will you help me to +free this land of my fathers from the yoke of its +tyrants, and be the war-chieftain of my people, and +stand by my throne in the days when the Rainbow +Banner shall once more float over the battlements +of the Sacsahuaman and the City of the Sun? If +you will, you shall have riches and power and all +that the heart of man can desire.'</p> + +<p>'Not all, I am afraid, Vilcaroya!' he said, interrupting +me with a laugh that had but little mirth in +it. 'Not all; but that would not be in your hands +to give. Never mind, it is the fortune of war, or +perhaps I should rather say of love. But for the +rest, yes. I believe your cause is a just and +righteous one, and what I can do to help it I will. +Henceforth we are brothers-in-arms, even though +we may perhaps be rivals in love. There, you +have my hand upon it, and with it the word of +an Englishman who never broke his word yet to +man or woman.'</p> + +<p>How shall I tell you of the great joy with which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span> +those brave, honest-spoken words of his filled me? +He, the man whom I had feared most, even as I +had learned to love him most, was the first to bid +me hope—and hope I did now, in spite of all things. +So, saying nothing, for my heart was too full for +speech, I put my hand in his, and there, as the +dawn brightened over the mountains, we clasped +hands in silence and sealed our compact, and when +the sun rose swiftly over the now glittering peaks, +I let go his hand and bowed myself before it, greeting +it as the bringer of a new day which was to end +the long night that had fallen over my land and my +people when the light of my last life was quenched +in the darkness of my death-sleep.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER VII</h3> + +<h3>IN THE THRONE-ROOM OF YUPANQUI</h3> + + +<p>We saw nothing of Golden Star the next day, +nor yet for many days afterwards, for, in spite +of our impatience, Ruth would not permit us to +do so. What her brother had said had speedily +proved itself to be true. She had come back to +life a child-woman. Her body was that of a girl +of seventeen years—which was her age when she +and I had drunk the draught of the death-sleep +together—and the kindly Powers that had presided +over her birth had shaped her in a mould +of almost perfect womanly beauty, yet, as Djama +had said, her mind was a virgin page, from which +the story of her past life had been utterly erased, +and on whose blank whiteness the story of her +new life had yet to be written.</p> + +<p>Now, on the writing of the first words of this +story, as Joyful Star told us in her sweetly-serious +way the night that she had sunk into<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span> +her first natural slumber, everything might +depend.</p> + +<p>'It is a task,' she had said that night, 'which I +fear terribly to enter upon, and yet I know that I +am the only one here who ought to undertake it. +She will need weeks and months of most careful +watching, and the sympathy that only another +woman, and one who loves her as I have already +learned to do, could give her. No woman ever had +such a task before, and very few have had so good +a work to do. There is something, too'—and here +I remember how subtle a change came into her +voice as she said this—'there is something in this +wonderful resemblance between us which tells me +that this is my duty, and I am going to devote +myself absolutely to it during every hour of her +waking life until she is able to do without my care. +I must watch her and care for her as a mother +does for her child, and you must let me do it +alone as long as I wish to, just as we had to let +Laurens do <i>his</i> work alone. Don't you think I +am right, professor?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' he answered, 'perfectly right, Miss Ruth. +I am sure everybody will agree with me that Her +Highness could not be in better hands than yours. +Indeed, as you say, yours are the only hands in +which she could possibly be trusted with safety +to her newly-awakening reason at such an extraordinary +juncture in her life.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span></p> + +<p>To this we all agreed willingly enough, and so +Joyful Star had the big room cleared out and +installed herself there with all the comforts and +luxuries that the inexhaustible wealth which was +now at my command could provide her with, so +that Golden Star should find her new world as +beautiful as might be. Meanwhile the professor, +with a trusty guide that I had provided him with +from among my own people, plunged afresh into +his beloved studies with such ardour that he +seemed to have almost forgotten all else that had +brought us to Peru.</p> + +<p>Francis Hartness had gone with Tupac—who, +in the sight of the Spaniards, was only his Indian +servant and guide—on a mission of importance to +the South, where the first rumblings of the coming +war-storm were already making themselves heard. +As for Djama, who, as you know, had no more +interest in the work that now lay before Francis +Hartness and myself than the professor had, he +went about for some days gloomy and silent, and +seemingly ill at ease, like a man who for a time +has lost his interest in life; and at last—it was on +the twentieth day after Golden Star had awakened—he +came to me when I was alone in my room +and said abruptly,—</p> + +<p>'Vilcaroya, do you think I have fairly earned +my reward for what I have done?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said, looking into his eyes and reading,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span> +though he knew it not, the thoughts that were +moving in his mind. 'You have done all that +you promised to do, but we have yet said nothing +of the price. How much do you ask for?'</p> + +<p>'As much as I can get!' he said, with a laugh +that pleased me but little. 'But, of course, I +know the work that you yourself have come here +to do, and I see that it will be expensive, so you +will find me reasonable.'</p> + +<p>'And you, I hope, will not find me ungenerous. +Do you remember what you saw in the Hall of +Gold?' As I said this, his self-command left him +for an instant. I saw his hands close, and his lips +tremble, and the fierce fire of the gold-lust spring +into his eyes as he replied,—</p> + +<p>'Yes; how could I forget it?'</p> + +<p>'And do you remember, too,' I said, 'the words +that you heard me speak when I stood before the +pyramid?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' he replied, with a faint flush coming into +his pale cheeks. 'It is not likely that I should +forget them either. Why do you ask?'</p> + +<p>'Because,' I said, speaking slowly as a man +who weighs his words well, 'saving only the sacred +emblems of the Sun, which it is not lawful for +me to give away, all that you saw there shall +belong to you and to him who made it possible +for you to do what you have done. You will +share it as you please—that is no care of mine<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span>—but +I have conditions to make for my own sake +and that of my people.'</p> + +<p>'What are they?' and as he spoke the flush +died out of his cheeks again.</p> + +<p>'That you shall both swear solemnly to me that, +come what may, no man shall ever know from +you where the gold came from, and that, moreover, +you shall never utter any word of my story +or Golden Star's where mortal ears can hear it, +nor give any sign or word to any man or woman +that shall lead him or her to guess that I am +what I am, or that my work here is what it is. +Swear that oath to me and you shall take your +gold and go in peace. Break it, and the fate +that I told you of shall be yours. Are you content?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' he said, 'and more than content; and I +swear to you most solemnly, on my own honour +and by all that I hold sacred, that I will keep +your secrets absolutely.'</p> + +<p>'No, not here,' I said, breaking into his speech; +'and more, it is not only your oath that I want. +There must be witnesses, for this is too great a +thing to do lightly. To-morrow night we will go +back to the Hall of Gold, and there you shall +swear your oaths and they shall be witnessed.'</p> + +<p>'Very well,' he said. 'Whenever and wherever +you like. But now, Vilcaroya, I have something +else to say to you. Personally, you know,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> +I have no further interests in Peru, saving one +only. Your next few years will be stormy ones, +and though I believe that, with the power you +have behind you, you will win in the end, yet you +know as well as I do that you will have to run +all the risks of a war that may be a very savage +one before you succeed. You may restore the +throne of the Incas, and reign upon it, or you +may be killed in the first battle. You will pardon +me speaking so plainly, won't you?'</p> + +<p>I bowed my head in silence and he went +on.</p> + +<p>'In view of this, then, I am going to propose +that when we leave Peru—I mean my sister and +the professor and myself—you will allow Ruth +to take Golden Star to England with her, say, +for three years or so, in order that her education +may be carried on to the best advantage. I will +promise you solemnly that during that time I +will not speak a word of love to her, or attempt +to be anything else to her than I am to Ruth, +and then if you succeed in your aims, as I hope +you will, we will come back and be Your Majesty's +guests for a time, and after that we shall see what +more the kindly Fates may have in store for you +and me.'</p> + +<p>No man ever heard more fairly spoken or +reasonable-sounding words than these were, and +yet all the while I listened to them I knew that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span> +they were but used to hide the real thoughts of +him who was speaking them. Yet what could I +answer him? Did they not seem to point out +the best of all courses that could be followed +for the welfare of Golden Star and the comfort +of her whose gentle hand was leading her nearer +every day to the fulfilment of the promise of her +new life? So, for want of anything better in my +mind, I answered,—</p> + +<p>'Your words are unwelcome to me, for so long +a parting would be a great sorrow to me; yet they +are wise, and that which is most pleasant is not +always the best to be done.'</p> + +<p>'Very well,' he said, 'I quite understand you, +so we won't say anything more about it until +then. I suppose I may tell the professor about +what we are to do to-morrow night?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said; 'there will be no harm in that, +since a share of the gold belongs to him as +well.'</p> + +<p>'And Hartness?'</p> + +<p>'He knows already, for I have told him not +only of the treasures in the Hall of Gold, but of +many others that will be used in the work that +he has sworn to do with me.'</p> + +<p>Later on that day when the mid-day heat had +cooled a little, I was walking alone in the garden +of the hacienda, thinking deeply of what Djama +had said and striving to find some plan of my<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span> +own that would be as good and yet not make the +parting that I dreaded needful. I turned, paying +but little heed to my way, into a winding pathway +shaded with trees and bordered with grass +and flowers. I was looking down upon the ground, +as was my wont, when I heard footsteps near +me and looked up. I had turned the bend in the +path, and there, but a few paces from me, stood +Golden Star and Ruth. I started and made a +motion as though I would turn back, but Ruth +immediately beckoned to me smilingly, and +said,—</p> + +<p>'Come and let me introduce you to your +sister, Vilcaroya. I think it's time you began +to be friends again. Don't you think she is +looking wonderfully well and strong, and—and +beautiful?'</p> + +<p>You may think, but I cannot tell you, of all +the feelings that rose up within me as I obeyed +her invitation. It was the first time that I +had seen Golden Star since the night she had +awakened. Nay, was it not the first time I +had seen her as a truly living woman since the +night of our bridal in the Sanctuary?</p> + +<p>She was dressed in garments made after the +fashion of Ruth's own, of light grey soft stuff, +and on the glorious wealth of her hair was a +broad-brimmed straw hat such as Ruth wore. +Indeed, to look at them both, standing there<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span> +side by side, they could but have been taken +for two twin sisters—daughters of the Day and +Night—as my loving fancy called them afterwards—rather +than the daughters of different +peoples, and children of far-parted generations, +whose hands, as they clasped, bridged the gulf +between one age of the world and another.</p> + +<p>As I approached, Golden Star's eyes looked +at me with the simple wonder that shines out +of the eyes of a little child, and like a little +child she smiled at me, and then she looked +at Ruth, and made a soft low sound that was +almost like the cooing of a child.</p> + +<p>'She is pleased to see you, Vilcaroya,' said +Ruth, taking hold of my hand and hers, 'but +of course she can't say so yet. Now, let me +teach her to shake hands with you.'</p> + +<p>Then she put into mine the soft, warm little +hand that I had last clasped when we went +hand in hand to the couch of our long sleep. +I pressed it gently, looking at her through the +tears that rose into my eyes, then I raised it to +my lips and kissed it, and she smiled, and made +the little soft sound again, and then Ruth put +her arm around her waist and said,—</p> + +<p>'Come, now, you are acquainted, and she likes +you. This will be a most valuable lesson for her. +Now, let us have a walk, and you tell me the +news, if there is any.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span></p> + +<p>'Most willingly,' I said, 'for I have much +news to tell.'</p> + +<p>So we turned back along the path into the +quietest part of the garden, I walking by Ruth's +side. And I told her of all that had passed between +her brother and me in the morning, and +of what was to be done on the following night. +She was looking very serious when I had finished, +and I could see that many unspoken thoughts +were working in her mind, and when I had done +she looked up at me and said,—</p> + +<p>'Laurens's plan seems a very good one at first +sight, but of course we cannot decide upon anything +until we have thought a good deal more +about it, and talked it well over amongst ourselves. +But, at anyrate, it would be several +weeks yet before I would even think of going +away with Golden Star, so there is plenty of time +for that. But to-morrow night—Listen, Vilcaroya, +may I ask a very great favour of you?'</p> + +<p>'Joyful Star can ask no favour of me,' I said. +'She can speak, and I can hear and obey.'</p> + +<p>'Nonsense, Vilcaroya! I wish you wouldn't +talk like that,' she answered with pretty petulance. +'Now, suppose I was to ask you to let +me see this wonderful treasure-house of yours +and promise faithfully not to tell anyone about +it—would you let me?'</p> + +<p>'It is not the best that I can show you,' I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span> +answered gladly, 'but if you desire to see it, it +is yours and all that it contains. I can give your +brother and the professor other gold, and I will +show you a greater treasure-house than this +under the Fortress itself.'</p> + +<p>'Well,' she laughed, 'I won't say now that I +won't have it, because the sight of all that gold +might be too much for me, but I should dearly +love to come and see it, and I think I might +venture to bring Golden Star too. She's quite +well and strong now, and if we are careful of +her, it can't do her any harm, and it may do her +good. Shall I bring her?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said, 'why not?'</p> + +<p>At this moment we saw Djama come walking +down the path towards us, and at the sight of +him there came to me, like the stab of a dagger +of ice, the sudden memory that, at the moment +I was speaking of my treasure-house under the +Sacsahuaman, I had heard a gentle rustle behind +some bushes close by the path, and a +sound like that of a stealthy tread.</p> + +<p>As Djama came near to us I saw the love-light +flash into his eyes, and a swift flush rise +into his sallow cheeks. He held out his hand +and quickened his pace, smiling as sweetly as +a woman the while. I was facing him a little +in advance, and I heard behind me a sharp, +low, shuddering cry of terror that shook my<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span> +heart as I turned to learn its cause. Golden +Star had thrown her arms round Ruth's neck, +and was clinging to her, trembling with fear, +and looking sideways at Djama with eyes fixed +and wide open with terror.</p> + +<p>You have seen how little children will go +smiling and fearless into the arms of one stranger +and shrink in hate and terror from another. +Their sight is keener than it is in after years, +when the dust of the world's conflict has dulled +it, and they can see plainly the good and the +evil that is hidden behind the mask of the face. +So it was with that child-soul of Golden Star's. +Though I was now to her as strange as Djama, +yet she had seen in me only the friend and +brother who loved her and wished her well, and +whose heart was clean in her sight; but in +Djama she had seen at a single glance the evil +that had only been revealed to me after many +weeks of watching.</p> + +<p>Though I hated him for the fear that he had +caused her, yet I was glad also, for now I saw +that the answer to his proposal would be easier +than I had thought for. As for him, his face +darkened and his black brows came together, +and the love-light in his eyes changed to a glare +of anger; but this was only for an instant. It +passed more quickly than the thunder-clouds +melt round the crest of Illampu. He stopped,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span> +and stood with his head slightly bent and his +hands spread, palms outward, in the posture of +one who asks pardon, and said, in a voice that +had no trace of anger,—</p> + +<p>'Forgive me, Ruth! I am afraid I have +startled our patient—or perhaps I should rather +say yours now. It was something more than +stupid of me to come upon you suddenly like +this, without any warning. Of all people in the +world, I ought to have known better than that. +But I suppose seeing Vilcaroya already here +made me forget myself. Did she start like that +when he came?'</p> + +<p>'No,' replied Ruth, still standing with her arm +where she had thrown it around Golden Star's +shoulders, and stroking her hair with the other. +'She—she saw him farther off than you, and I +took her towards him, so I suppose the shock +was not so great. But please go away, both of +you, now. You see she is terribly frightened, +and she is trembling as though someone had +struck her. I must take her into the house and +get her quiet again, or the consequences may +be serious.'</p> + +<p>Djama turned away without a word, his face +darkening again as he did so, and with one +backward glance at Golden Star, who had now +raised her head from Ruth's breast, and was +staring after us with fixed, wide-open eyes, I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span> +turned and walked away beside him, neither of +us speaking a word, for we were both too busy +with our own thoughts.</p> + +<p>That night Francis Hartness and Tupac returned +from their journey to the South, and as +the professor was also in the house I told them +of what I wished done on the following night, +and bade Tupac make all preparation. The +next day we all started in the cool of the morning +to go to the Rodadero as though for a picnic, +as the people of Cuzco often do, so that there +might be no suspicion of our true object. We +all rode upon horses, saving Golden Star, who +was carried in a hammock litter, that I had had +made for her, and Tupac, and six of our people +who came with us as bearers and servants.</p> + +<p>We spent the day wandering about among the +huge ruins of the Sacsahuaman, and exploring +the wonders of the carved rocks and underground +passages and altar-places, which have been the +marvel of every traveller to the hills about +Cuzco, and all that I knew of the upper +works I told my companions, and showed them +as well as I could what the mighty fastness +had been in the days of its pride and unbroken +strength.</p> + +<p>Then, when the brief twilight came, I bade +one of our men take the beasts into a chamber +among the rocks that I had shown him, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span> +where plenty of fodder had been stored a few +days before. After this we waited a little +longer till night fell, and then I bade Tupac +do what I had bidden him the day before. +His voice rose shrill and plaintive in the silence, +chanting a song that you may have heard the +Indians singing in Peru when returning from +their labours, and presently, from among the +rocks on the plain, and from the shadowy +lines of the Fortress, many silent figures stole +out and went towards the valley in which the +Sayacusca stands.</p> + +<p>Then I told my companions that all, save those +of the Blood, must have their eyes bandaged, +as Djama's had been before, and when they +had submitted willingly to this, knowing that +no harm would come to them, we led them +to the Sayacusca, I leading Ruth by the hand, +and following the bearers of Golden Star's litter, +and there the way to the Hall of Gold was +opened as before, and we entered it, followed +by a long line of the Children of the Blood.</p> + +<p>But I made no halt here, nor did I let my +companions even see the treasure that was to +be divided between Djama and the professor +according to my promise, for I had greater +marvels in store for them. So, lantern in hand, +I led the way through a winding gallery behind +the pyramid of gold of which I told you before.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span> +At the end of this was a door, formed by a +revolving stone similar to that at the entrance +to the hall. This Tupac and another opened +under my directions, and we entered a long, +straight passage behind it. At the end was +a broad flight of stone steps, and at the top +were two low bronze doors bolted into pillars +on either side. The doors had no hinges, +but they turned with the pillars, and no one +who did not know this, or how the pillars +turned, could open them. But this secret was +one of many others that I had brought with +me from the past, and in a few moments the +doors were standing open before us.</p> + +<p>We passed in, and I closed them behind +us. Two of my men had come laden with +great candles and torches, and these I had +lighted and placed in golden sconces which stood +out from the walls in the great hall into which +we had passed through the bronze doors. When +this had been done, I beckoned to Tupac, and +went silently with him to the other end of the +hall, where, on a throne of gold under a canopy +of silver, sat a silent figure clad in the imperial +robes, and with a mask of beaten gold over +its face, according to the ancient custom. It +was the effigy of the great Yupanqui, father of +Huayna-Capac, which had been seated here +since his death, as an emblem of the unbroken<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span> +sovereignty of his race, giving place in turn to +his son and grandson on the days that they +were crowned, and being replaced when the +ceremony was over.</p> + +<p>Now, with Tupac's help I carried the effigy +into a little chamber behind the throne, and +there quickly removed my upper clothing and +dressed myself as I had done before in the +Hall of Gold, and took my place on the throne. +Then I bade Tupac lead Joyful Star, with her +eyes still bandaged, to me. When he had +placed her before me, I made a sign to him, +and the bandage fell from her eyes. She turned +white as death, and staggered back a pace, with +her hands clasped to her temples, and there she +stood, staring wide-eyed at me and all the +splendours about her.</p> + +<p>Wherever her gaze wandered it saw nothing +but gold and silver and gems and rich-dyed +hangings of silk and wool, whose brilliant hues +no time could dim. The roof and the upper +halves of the walls were covered with plates of +burnished silver. Around the walls, half-way +between the floor and the ceiling, ran a great +cornice or ledge of gold, on which stood the +golden chairs in which were seated the mummies +of the twenty Incas which I had last seen in the +Sanctuary of the Sun, looking down through the +eye-holes in their golden masks.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span></p> + +<p>From the cornice to the floor hung the bright-hued +hangings, and against these were ranged +along the floor on either side threescore seats +of silver, and the floor was paved with diamond-shaped +blocks of gold and silver set alternately. +Behind the throne on which I sat rose from the +floor to roof a sloping wall of golden ingots, and +on either hand stood a great golden vase, heaped +high with unset gems, emeralds and diamonds, +pearls and sapphires and rubies, precious almost +beyond price; and on the roof above my throne +a great, golden image of the Sun, encircled by +spreading rays of gems, glowed and sparkled in +the light of the candles and torches.</p> + +<p>At last Ruth's wandering gaze became steady +and rested upon my face, and I looked back into +her eyes, making no sign until she should speak, +and sitting motionless as the effigy whose place +I had taken.</p> + +<p>'Where am I?' she said at last in a low, +faint voice, like one awakening from a dream. +'And who are you? Surely you cannot be—and +yet, yes, you are Vilcaroya! What has +happened?'</p> + +<p>'Nothing more than the granting of Joyful +Star's request, save that through the treasure-house +which she asked to see I have brought +her to a better one. Does it please her?'</p> + +<p>'Is it real, Vilcaroya?' she whispered. 'Is all<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span> +this really gold and silver, and are these real +diamonds and rubies and emeralds, or am I +only dreaming? Does it please me? What a +question! I have never even dreamed of anything +like it. Where are we, Vilcaroya?'</p> + +<p>'In the throne-room of the Incas, beneath what +was once their palace and fortress on the hill of +Sacsahuaman,' I answered, 'and this is the +throne of the great Yupanqui, the greatest +earthly king and conqueror of my race. I sat +here and crowned myself Inca in the presence of +Anda-Huillac and the priests and nobles of the +Land of the Four Regions on the day before +the night when I drank the death-draught with +Golden Star.'</p> + +<p>'Ah, yes, where is she?' she cried, looking +round only to see that all the rest had vanished, +and that she and I were alone in the great hall. +'What have they done with her, and where are +Laurens and the others?' she cried, looking fearfully +and almost mistrustingly at me. 'What +have you done with them, Vilcaroya?'</p> + +<p>'They are safe,' I said. 'Tupac and his men +have care of them, and they will come back when +I bid him bring them. But I have need of your +presence here alone before I do that,' I went on, +rising from my seat as I spoke. 'Has Joyful +Star ever sat on a throne?'</p> + +<p>'No,' she stammered, staring at me with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span> +wonder in her eyes. 'You know I haven't. +Why should you ask?'</p> + +<p>'Then sit on mine,' I said, 'for I have something +to say to you which I can best say and +you can best hear if we change places. Nay, +I will take no denial,' I said, drawing her +by the hand up the steps in front of the throne, +'for it is not only your—your friend who is +asking, but a crowned king in his own palace, +who is lord of life and death over all who +enter it.'</p> + +<p>Half frightened and half wondering, she submitted +to my will and allowed me to seat her +in the chair which no woman had ever sat in +before. Then I took her hand, and, dropping +on one knee on the upper step, I said,—</p> + +<p>'Joyful Star has taken one queen from me, and +she alone can give me another to fill her place. +She is sitting where the great Yupanqui sat when +he ruled all the land from north to south, and +from the eastern mountains to the sea, and ere +long I too shall reign, sole and undisputed lord, +over a realm wider even than that. Many things +have been done that Joyful Star knows not of +since I came back to my country and my +people. Through all the Land of the Four +Regions the word has gone forth, with the swiftness +of thought, that the Son of the Sun has +returned, and that the heir of the divine<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> +Manco has come to deliver his children from +bondage.<a name="FNanchor_B_" id="FNanchor_B_"></a><a href="#Footnote_B_" class="fnanchor">[B]</a></p> + +<p>'Everywhere the tidings have been received +with joy, and the people are longing to return to +the allegiance of their fathers, and tread their +oppressors under foot. Before many days civil +war will be raging throughout the lands of the +south, and I have but to set flowing that golden +stream, one of whose many sources is here, and +say, "Here is gold and silver in plenty for all +who will fight under the Rainbow Banner," and +I shall have armies and fleets to do what I will +with, and the sway of my sceptre shall reach from +north to south and sea to sea.</p> + +<p>'This I shall do because of my oath; but I +have brought Joyful Star here to tell her, in the +most sacred place that is left in the Land of the +Four Regions, that I shall also do it so that she, +if she will, may be queen where I am king, and +sit beside me on my throne, and make my empire +a paradise by the brightness and the sweetness of +her presence. I cannot forget, as she bade me do—for +the words that I said in the heat of my<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span> +passion are true—for I love you, Joyful Star, +and all that I have or shall ever have on earth +will be worthless to me unless you take it as +a gift from my hands. Nay, do not speak, for +now I seek no answer, whether good or evil. +I have brought you here that I, as a king, might +kneel at the feet of her whom I would win for +my queen, and from now until I sit in the sight +of all the world on the throne of the Four Regions +no other words of love shall pass my lips. So +you shall have many days to ponder what I have +said, and to ask your own heart whether it will +say "yes" or "no" to me when I stretch out my +hand from my throne and ask you to come and +sit beside me and rule my people with me.'</p> + +<p>Before she could answer, I stood up and clapped +my hands, and Tupac with six others, dressed +now in the forbidden costume of their ancestors, +entered the hall from the ante-chamber, into +which they had taken the others, and came +towards me, bearing wands across their shoulders +in token of homage, and with heads downbent, +not daring to look upon my majesty till I bade +them. I drew Joyful Star from the throne by +the hand, and seating myself in it, said in the +ancient tongue,—</p> + +<p>'Let the Children of the Blood enter into the +presence of their father and their lord, and let +the strangers be brought in, and the other maiden,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span> +all with eyes bandaged, and let seats of silver +be placed to the right and left of the throne, +one for each of the virgins of the Sun to sit +upon. Are all things else ready, Tupac-Rayca?'</p> + +<p>'Yes, lord,' he answered, stepping out in front +of the others and falling on his knees, 'and the +Children of the Blood are waiting to see the glory +of thy presence and hear the words of wisdom and +hope from thy lips.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span></p> + + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_B_" id="Footnote_B_"></a><a href="#FNanchor_B_"><span class="label">[B]</span></a> The Inca Indians of the Sierra region possess the same extraordinary +faculty of transmitting intelligence without apparent +material means that the Hindoos and the Arabs have. Thus, +during the last revolution in Peru, the fall of Lima was known to +the Indians of Bolivia on the southern shore of Lake Titicaca three +days after it happened, though the telegraph wires were cut and all +ordinary communications suspended. Without the telegraph this +would be quite impossible by any means known to Europeans.</p></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER VIII</h3> + +<h3>HOW THE SOUL OF GOLDEN STAR CAME BACK</h3> + + +<p>When the two chairs had been brought in and +placed according to my orders, I rose from my +throne and led Joyful Star to the one on my +left hand and placed her in it, still silent with +the wonder and perplexity of what she had seen +and heard since her eyes were opened. Then, +seating myself again, I bade Tupac summon the +Children of the Blood to take their places, and +presently he ushered them in from the chambers +that opened out of the great hall on either hand +at the other end.</p> + +<p>There were threescore of them, the heads of +the families of Ayllos, whose blood was the purest +and whose descent was most direct from the old +nobility of my own days. Each of them, too, +under the outward husk of his forlorn and degraded +state, had preserved unsullied the ancient +faith and traditions of the sacred race, and,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span> +against all appearances, had steadfastly hoped +for the fulfilment of the promises that had been +given in the olden times. More than this, too—each +had treasured, as a miser hoards his gold, +the ever-growing legacy of hate which the oppression +and contempt of the Spaniards and their +meaner descendants had heaped up from generation +to generation against the long-awaited day +of vengeance which, as but two or three in +that strange company alone knew, was now so +near at hand.</p> + +<p>Ever since I had revealed myself to them in the +Hall of Gold they had been working for the end in +view with the swift, subtle arts known only to those +of their race, and already, from Quito in the north +to Santiago in the south, tidings had gone forth +that the day of deliverance was approaching, and +that ere long the Rainbow Banner would be raised +by the hands of him for whom the Children of the +Sun had waited.</p> + +<p>Each of the fathers of the people was dressed, +as Tupac was, in the long-forbidden garb of the +ancient nobility, and each as he entered stopped in +the centre of the hall and paid his homage before +he went to his seat. Then, when all were seated, +I ordered that the strangers should be brought in, +and they were led into the midst of the silent +assembly, with their eyes still bandaged. Over +Golden Star's head a veil had been thrown, hiding<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span> +her face, for it was my purpose that it should not +be seen for the present, and how strangely this +purpose worked you shall soon see.</p> + +<p>As she came up the middle of the hall, following +Tupac, who was leading her as obedient as +a little child, I descended from the throne and +went to meet her, and led her to the seat on +my right hand and placed her in it. Francis +Hartness, the professor and Djama I left standing +in the middle of the hall, each with one +of Tupac's chosen guards beside him. When +Golden Star was seated, I stood up in front of +the throne and said to those assembled, speaking +in the ancient tongue,—</p> + +<p>'Sons of the Blood and fathers of the Oppressed, +you know already how the promise that +was made by our Father the Sun, through the +lips of his high priest, in the days when first +the oppressors came, has been in part most +faithfully and marvellously fulfilled. I, Vilcaroya—son +of Huayna-Capac, son of the great +Yupanqui Inca, before whose throne-seat I am +now standing alive in your presence—am he of +whom it was said that one who should pass +from life to life through the shadows of death +should grasp the sceptre of the divine Manco, +and restore the ancient glory of the Children +of the Sun. And with me, as you know, there +was another, at whose call and for love of whom<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span> +I dared the ordeal of the death-sleep and +swore the oath which I have returned to the +world of living men to fulfil. I have already +given you some proof that I am what I say I +am, for I have revealed to you secrets which +were buried in the grave with me and in those +faithful hearts which have been pulseless now +for many generations.</p> + +<p>'But now, that all things may be made plain +to you, and that no doubts may remain in your +hearts to hinder the working of our sacred +purpose, I have brought here before you witnesses +of the wonders that have been worked—even +those who wrought them themselves, that +their own lips may tell you the story; and with +them I have brought yet another witness who, +though she cannot speak to you in our ancient +tongue, of which our Father, for his own wise +purposes, has deprived her during her long sleep, +will yet in her own person and even with +silent lips be witness enough that I have not lied +to you. Now let the eyes of the strangers be +uncovered and their mouths opened that they +may see and speak.'</p> + +<p>Even as the words left my lips they were +obeyed, and at the same time I stretched out +my right hand and raised the veil from the head +of Golden Star, and unloosed the bandage from +her eyes.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span></p> + +<p>A deep murmur of wonder ran round the hall; +a sharp cry of amazement broke from Djama's +lips, and the two others stared blankly about +them. Then I raised my left hand to command +silence, and, still speaking the ancient speech and +pointing with my right hand to Golden Star, said,—</p> + +<p>'This, O Fathers of the People, is she who +drank the death-draught with me. This is Cory-Coyllur, +daughter of Huayna-Capac, and sister +of the long-ago murdered Huascar, and my sister, +too, since her great father was mine also. With +her, as the tradition was told to you, I plighted +the marriage-troth before the altar in the +Sanctuary of the Sun, and of that troth I would +speak to you now. Such marriage is no longer +lawful in the world to which we have returned, +and in token of this our Father the Sun has +sent this other likeness of Golden Star, who sits +upon my left hand, to tell me that it may not +be; and to make the message surer, it has +pleased him also to put into my heart a love +for her differing from, though not greater than +that which I have borne for Golden Star, and +if my Father who has given me this love shall +also look with kindness upon my longing, then +Joyful Star, as I have named her, shall be my +Coya<a name="FNanchor_C_" id="FNanchor_C_"></a><a href="#Footnote_C_" class="fnanchor">[C]</a> and my queen, and Golden Star shall<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span> +be her sister and mine, and I doubt not that +in his own good time our Father will send her +a fitting mate, that her heart may not be empty +nor her life lonely.'</p> + +<p>As I said these last words I saw the eyes +of all who were sitting in the chairs turn, as if +moved by one impulse, and rest on Francis +Hartness, standing strong and stately in the +midst of the little group in the middle of the +hall, overtopping the others by nearly a span, +and crowned with his curling golden hair; and +as I, too, looked at him, a new thought came +into my mind, and I spoke aloud again and +said,—</p> + +<p>'Yes, Brothers of the Blood, I read your +thought. The stranger from the land which is +the greatest of all lands in the world of to-day, +is a true Son of the Sun, though not +of our blood, for his heart is clean and his +tongue is straight and his arm strong, and +perchance it may please our Father to +bring about that which he has put into our +hearts.'</p> + +<p>At this another murmur ran round the hall, +and every head was bowed in assent.</p> + +<p>Now all this time the three Englishmen had +been standing patiently in the midst of the +hall, looking about them at its splendours, +and waiting till I should speak to them,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span> +for the professor knew enough of the Quichua +tongue to follow what I had been saying, +and had told the others that I was speaking +of them. Now I spoke to them in English, +and told them what I had brought them to +the throne-room for, and then I had chairs +placed for them at top of the hall, to my left +hand.</p> + +<p>When they had taken their places, I asked +the professor to speak in Spanish to those +assembled, and tell them whether or not the +story of my return to life was true, and whether +or not Golden Star had been found where Anda-Huillac +and the priests had placed her, and had +been, like me, restored to life by the arts +of Djama his friend. This he did in few, +straight words, and after him Djama rose +at my bidding and told them also what he +had done. When he had finished I took the +Llautu from my head and raised it above +me with outstretched arms and said in a loud +voice,—</p> + +<p>'If you, O Children of the Blood and Sons +of the Ancient Race, believe now that I am in +truth Vilcaroya, son of Huayna-Capac, and lawful +heir of the divine Manco, from whom all the +Incas of our race draw their royal blood, then +take me for your lord as my father was the +lord of your fathers; or if any shall have yet<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span> +doubt in his heart, let him speak now or for +ever be silent.'</p> + +<p>Then with one accord they rose from their +seats and came before me and prostrated themselves +on the shining pavement of the throne-room, +and began to chant, in a low, soft tone, +the Song of Homage with which of old the +new-crowned Incas had been hailed, generation +after generation, Sons of the Sun and lords of +life and death throughout the Land of the Four +Regions.</p> + +<p>And now a wondrous thing happened. As I +stood there facing the prostrate throng, lowering +the Llautu on to my head, I heard a low, +sharp cry beside me on my right hand. I turned +half round, and there I saw Golden Star staring +at me with eyes burning with the light that +shone through them from her new-awakened +soul.</p> + +<p>Her hands were clasped to her temples, pushing +back her thick, bright hair from her forehead. +Her face was flushed, and her half-open lips +were working as though they were striving to +shape some long-forgotten words. At the instant +that the Llautu touched my brows, she rose to +her feet. Then a cry burst from her lips and +went ringing down the hall, and the next +moment she had thrown herself forward and I +had caught her in my arms.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span></p> + +<p>As I did so our eyes met, and our hearts +looked at each other through them. In that +one burning glance the mists of the long years +were melted, all things else were forgotten, and +for the moment we stood alone—the children of +a long-dead generation—in the solitude that +our strange fate had made about us. Then +her lips moved, not dumbly this time, and in +a voice that woke, who shall say how many +memories in my heart, she said,—</p> + +<p>'Have they awakened us, my lord? Tell +me how long we have slept, my Vilcaroya. It +seems long to me, and I have had strange, +dim dreams, and thought I was not one, but +two, and that one of myselves was your sister +and the other was your Coya and queen. +It was strange, was it not, to dream like +that?'</p> + +<p>'Not so strange but that it may be true, O +my sister, Golden Star,' I said, my wonder for +the moment overcome by a new hope that uprose +within me at her words. 'Stranger things +than that have happened since we fell asleep +together in the distant days that are no more. +See, Ñusta mi, here is your other self, the living +shape of that sister-soul of yours, who has +watched over you and cared for you and loved +you since you drew the first breath of your +new life. She cannot speak our tongue, for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span> +she is the daughter of another age than ours, +but she has taught me hers and I will speak +for you.'</p> + +<p>As I said this I took her hands from where +they rested on my shoulders, and led her to the +seat of Joyful Star, who was standing in front +of it, with one hand on the arm of her chair +and the other one clasped to her heart, her +face white with fear and her eyes wide with +wonder.</p> + +<p>'What has happened, Vilcaroya?' she said, +in a voice so low that it was almost a +whisper. 'Has her memory come back, and +does she believe herself to be your—your +wife?'</p> + +<p>As she forced the last word from her +hesitating lips I saw the hot blood flow +into her cheeks, and a new light that shot +like a dart of fire into my heart leapt into her +eyes.</p> + +<p>'No,' I said, with a smile that was quickly +answered by one that came unawares to her +lips. 'She calls herself my sister and me her +lord, and says that she has dreamed that she +is not one but two, and that her other +sister-self is Vilcaroya's wife and queen. +Now, if that dream may be the truth, tell +her so!'</p> + +<p>And with that I took her hand gently from<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span> +where it rested on the chair and laid Golden +Star's in it.</p> + +<p>'But—I cannot speak your language, and she +wouldn't understand me,' she said softly, with +one swift glance at me and another longer look +at Golden Star's smiling face, so wondrous like +her own.</p> + +<p>'There is another speech than that of the +tongue,' I answered, 'which all men understand.'</p> + +<p>'Yes!' she said, and then she drew Golden +Star gently to her and kissed her.</p> + +<p>All this while the Ayllos had remained silent +and prostrate before the throne, none daring to +raise their heads till I bade them, and the three +Englishmen sat still, hearing what I had said +to Joyful Star and her answer to it, and yet +neither speaking nor rising from their seats, +each full of his own thoughts and not willing +to betray his feelings by any rash word that he +might speak in the wonder of the moment. +But now I turned with my heart full of joy +and new hope, and said in a voice in which my +gladness seemed to sing like a bird in the +morning sky,—</p> + +<p>'Rise up, Brothers of the Blood, and look +upon your lord and rejoice with him, for our +Father the Sun has looked kindly upon him +and filled all his life with light. He has given +back memory and speech to Golden Star, his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span> +daughter, and put it into the heart of Joyful +Star, her other sister-self, to love her and to +make plain that which might else have been +dark.'</p> + +<p>Then they all rose to their feet and saluted +me and paid their homage to Golden Star and +Joyful Star as well, and then I waved them +to their seats, and when they had gone I led +Golden Star back to her chair, and then I called +Djama to me, and when he came and stood +before me I said,—</p> + +<p>'You have seen what has happened, and you +have heard the words that have been said. +You see now that there is no need for +Golden Star to go to England. Therefore it +remains but for you and for your friend to +take the treasure that is yours, and for us to +say farewell.'</p> + +<p>'And Ruth?' he asked. 'You know, of +course, that that will mean farewell to her +also.'</p> + +<p>I could see that he was ill at ease, and that +his words were not the words that his true +thoughts would have spoken. As I looked at +him I saw that his eyes shifted and wandered +from my gaze, and I said coldly,—</p> + +<p>'Much has happened since we last spoke of +this. It will be for Joyful Star herself to say +whether she will bid me farewell or not. Is<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span> +she not free to go or stay where she pleases? +Say, now, when I shall command the treasure +to be taken out of the Hall of Gold for you, +and where you wish it to be placed.'</p> + +<p>'I must ask you to give me time to think +about that and talk it over with the professor,' +he said, 'for we have no means of taking +such an immense amount of gold to the +coast and getting it on board ship without +suspicion.'</p> + +<p>'Go, then,' I said, 'and speak with him, but +remember that it must be done quickly, for ere +many days are past there will be war in the +land, and neither your lives nor your gold will +be safe.'</p> + +<p>'I will take good care of that,' he said in a +tone whose strangeness told me more than his +words, and with that he turned away and sat +down beside the professor, with the thoughts +that were within his heart still unspoken. As +soon as he had gone back to his seat I called +Francis Hartness to me and set him beside me +on the right hand of the throne, and then I +told who he was and showed that he was well +skilled in those new arts of warfare which had +taken the place of our ancient methods, and +how he had promised to use his knowledge for +me and lead my armies into battle, hazarding +his own life on the chance of our success; and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span> +when I had said this I named him leader of all +those who should range themselves under the +Rainbow Banner when the day of battle came, +and bade all present obey his orders and enforce +obedience to them, even as though his commands +were my own.</p> + +<p>Then I bade Francis Hartness himself speak +all that was in his mind freely and without fear +of betrayal concerning the war that was soon +to be waged between the rival factions of our +oppressors and the means that were to be used +to turn their strife to our own account, and this +he did, speaking in fluent Spanish and in short, +clear sentences, as a man of action and a +soldier should speak.</p> + +<p>He told how he had made himself acquainted +with the forces on both sides, and how, with the +help of Tupac, he had sounded the feelings of +those by whom the fighting would have to be done, +and had found them willing to leave the service +of the schemers who sought to make themselves +tyrants over the land, and fight for those whose +purpose it was to restore the ancient rule and +give liberty to all to use their lives as they thought +best and to win for themselves as many of the +gifts of the All-Father as they were able to do. +He told, too, how he had sent many messages +over the lightning-wires to his own country, +bidding friends like himself in war to come out<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span> +as quickly as might be to find the fortune that +awaited them, yet saying nothing of war but only +of gold that was to be had for the taking.</p> + +<p>When he had finished, I bade Tupac summon +all who were present to the foot of the throne, +and then I spoke to them of the plans that I had +made with Francis Hartness in all their details, +and showed them how each, according to his +opportunities, could give his help in carrying +them out, and then, as by this time the night +was far spent and there was yet work of another +sort to do, I sent them back to their seats, and +calling Ruth and Golden Star to me, I bade them +follow me, and led the way down the hall and +through one of the passages at the end until I +brought them to a chamber which Tupac and his +comrades had already prepared for them by my +orders, and here I left them to take their rest +together, promising to return in the morning.</p> + +<p>When I got back into the throne-room Djama +asked me whither I had taken his sister, and I +told him what I had done, saying that the hour +was now too late for us to return to our home on +the other side of the valley, and that, moreover, +it was needful for us to go back to the Hall of +Gold to make a proper count of the treasure and +to let him and the professor swear their oaths of +secrecy in the presence of the fathers of my +people.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span></p> + +<p>Then I left him, looking much more ill at ease +than such tidings should have made him feel, +and told Tupac in the ancient tongue to take three +of his companions and go and do that which it +was now time to do. So he went and chose his +men and departed through the bronze doors by +which we had entered the hall. After that I +named a guard to remain all night in the +hall, and bade the rest go and put on their +everyday clothing, and I, too, went back into +the chamber behind the throne and changed +my imperial garments for the others that I had +put off.</p> + +<p>Then I ordered the torches and candles to be +extinguished, all saving a few that were left for +the guards, and then the eyes of Djama and the +professor were bandaged afresh, though those of +Francis Hartness—he being now one of us and +devoted to our cause—were left open; and when +this was done the lanterns were lit and I led the +way into the ante-chamber of the throne-room, +where the bronze doors still stood open as Tupac +had left them.</p> + +<p>I stood by them till the last man had passed +out, then I went through and closed them. Then +I followed the rest and again placed myself at +their head. But when we reached the end of the +straight passage, instead of turning the revolving +pillar which closed the entrance of the winding<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span> +passage leading to the Hall of Gold, I sought +about with my lantern on the floor until I found +three marks in the shape of a triangle in one +corner of a great square slab of stone, and, taking +a long staff which one of the men carried, I +placed the end on the triangle and calling two +others to help me, we bore downwards with all +our weight, and when we had thrust awhile +on the staff the corner of the slab sank into the +floor and it turned on a diagonal axis until it +stood upright, leaving a three-cornered space +large enough for a man's body to pass through +easily. Then I made a sign to one of the Ayllos +and said,—</p> + +<p>'Anahuac, take your lantern down there and +light the way down the steps.'</p> + +<p>'Truly there are no secrets in the land hidden +from the eyes of our Lord!' he said, glancing +round in wonder at the rest, and then he lowered +himself with his lantern into the hole and +disappeared.</p> + +<p>Then I bade the rest follow him one by one, +and so all went down, I going last with Francis +Hartness, who helped me to put the stone back +into its place.</p> + +<p>Our way now led along a rough-hewn gallery +that sloped gently upwards for some twelve +hundred paces, and at the end of it there was +a little chamber measuring some twenty feet<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span> +each way and having no apparent outlet, but in +the middle of one of the walls there was another +of the cunningly-constructed revolving stones +which our ancient masons ever used to bar their +secret ways, and this three of our men, working +as I told them, turned on its hinge, and through +the opening that was thus made we passed out in +single file to a little rock-walled valley over which +the stars were shining.</p> + +<p>The door was closed behind us, and dust and +dirt were rubbed over the thin lines which marked +where it fitted into the rock, and then we extinguished +our lanterns and passed out of the +valley on to the pampa.</p> + +<p>The place where we had come out was about +a thousand paces from the walls of the Sacsahuaman. +We halted on the plain and I gave my +last orders to the Ayllos. Then we set out in the +direction of the Fortress, and as we went one by +one my followers disappeared silently into the +half darkness about us till at last only four of +them were left, two leading Djama and two the +professor.</p> + +<p>I had been talking of many things with Francis +Hartness on the way, and showing him how in +the olden times we had made use of the secret +passages such as those he had already seen, and +when we saw that we had come out by a way +different to that which we had entered, he asked<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span> +me the reason of it, and I answered him in a low +voice and said,—</p> + +<p>'Because the other way is closed. Have +patience a little while and you shall see why.'</p> + +<p>Then we went on our way in silence until +we came to the edge of the valley in which +the Sayacusca stands. Here I halted and +whispered a few words to the men who were +leading Djama and the professor. They slipped +off their ponchos and threw them over the +heads of their prisoners, for such the two were +now to be for the present. I heard a muffled +cry from Djama, and I went to him and put +my hand on his shoulder and said in a whisper,—</p> + +<p>'Keep quiet and lie down. These men have +knives and will use them at my bidding.'</p> + +<p>Then they pulled him and the professor down, +and they lay quiet, knowing that their lives +were in my hands, and I lay down on the edge +of the valley, signing to Francis Hartness to +come and lie beside me. Then I pointed into +the valley and bade him watch. Presently, in +the dim light, we made out figures moving +about the rock, and caught every now and then +the glint of the star-rays along thin lines of +polished metal.</p> + +<p>'Rifle barrels!' he whispered. 'What are +they doing here? I didn't know that your +men had any weapons yet.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span></p> + +<p>'No,' I said, 'those are in the hands of soldiers +from Cuzco. The time has come sooner than +I thought for, and yet not too soon. You will +see the first blow struck for the freedom of my +people before to-morrow's sun rises.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span></p> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_C_" id="Footnote_C_"></a><a href="#FNanchor_C_"><span class="label">[C]</span></a> The queen-consort of the Inca, as distinguished from the +many others whom the ancient laws allowed him to marry.</p></div> + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER IX</h3> + +<h3>THE TREACHERY OF DJAMA</h3> + + +<p>'Wait now for a little while with patience,' I +said, laying my hand on his shoulder, 'and +you shall see a strange thing, a thing that +shall show you how strong the old traditions +are still in the land of the Incas. Lie here +and do not let yourself be seen till I send +a messenger for you. It will not be very +long.'</p> + +<p>He nodded and I rose quietly to my feet +and went round the hollow until I got the +great stone between me and the place where +the soldiers were standing, and then I went +down on my hands and knees and crept quietly +towards it and climbed up a flight of steps +carved in it. This took me to the top of the +cleft in which is the broken stairway. I climbed +down this and dropped softly into the hole at +the bottom. It was dry now, for Tupac had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span> +done that which I had bidden him in the +throne-room. I felt my way down the steps +till I came to the wall at the bottom. Then I +whispered his name, and he answered out of the +darkness in the old language,—</p> + +<p>'I am here, Lord, and all that has been +ordered is done.'</p> + +<p>I crept towards him along the wall, measuring +my way along it with my outstretched +arms till I knew that I had come to the +revolving stone which closed the way into the +hall. He was standing against it, and one +of the others was with him. I felt over the +door till I found the silver socket, and then +we opened the door as before with the bar +which Tupac had brought. Then I went down +through the hall and lighted a lantern and +went into the little chamber where, as before, +I changed my clothing for the imperial robes, +and set the Llautu on my head; but I kept +on my belt under my cloak, and put two +revolvers in it in case I should need them, and +when I went back into the hall Tupac and +the others were lighting candles and putting +them in the holders round the walls as I had +bidden them. When this was done I said to +him,—</p> + +<p>'Go now and bring the others down, first the +soldiers with their officer, by whose side you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span> +must keep closely, and see that your knife is +ready. Then let Ainu bring the Men of the +Blood, and the strangers quickly after them, and +bid <ins class="correction" title="Transcriber's Note: The original text reads 'Anahauc'">Anahuac</ins> and Ainu close the door when the +last man has entered.'</p> + +<p>He bowed his head, and the two went out +and left me sitting there on a seat built up of +blocks of gold before the pyramid, waiting to +play my part in the scene that was to follow, +and strike the first blow in the battle that I +had come to fight. Presently I heard the rattle +of arms and the sound of footsteps coming along +the passage. I took one of the revolvers out +of my belt and held it ready under my cloak, +and sat still and rigid as the effigy of Yupanqui, +looking straight before me at the entrance at +the other end.</p> + +<p>Tupac came in first, and close behind him +was a Spanish officer with a drawn sword in +his hand. After him came the soldiers, two and +two, with their rifles and bayonets. The officer +stopped and stared about him, blinking with +eyes half dazzled by the sudden light and the +glitter of the gold and jewels which he saw +wherever he looked. The same instant I saw +the gleam of steel in Tupac's hand close to +his yellow throat. Then he said to him in +Spanish,—</p> + +<p>'Put up your sword, señor, and come with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span> +me and beg your life from the Son of the Sun +who sits yonder on his throne.'</p> + +<p>The Spaniard uttered a loud cry of amazement +as his eyes fell upon me, for so far he +had not seen me, having been too much taken +up by the splendours of the hall. Then he +turned and called to his soldiers, but while the +cry was still in his throat, Tupac's arm went +round his neck and the knife-point touched his +skin. Then he bade two of the soldiers take +the sword out of his hand and hold him fast, +which they did, greatly to his wonder, for he did +not know that the betrayer was already betrayed. +As soon as he was safe, Tupac told the other +soldiers to take their places along the walls, and +they did so in silence, yet wondering greatly at +all they saw. There were four-and-twenty of +them, not counting the two who held the officer, +all men of Indian blood whom the Spaniards<a name="FNanchor_D_" id="FNanchor_D_"></a><a href="#Footnote_D_" class="fnanchor">[D]</a> +had made rather slaves than soldiers to fight +their petty quarrels for them for little pay and +scanty food.</p> + +<p>After them came Anahuac and Ainu and the +rest of the Men of the Blood, bringing with +them Djama and the professor blindfolded, and +Francis Hartness with his eyes unbound. All +this time I had neither moved nor made a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span> +sound, and the soldiers were looking at me +almost in terror, wondering whether I was truly +a man or one of the dead Incas with living eyes +in his head. As for the Spanish officer, being +a coward, as many of his sort are, he was +already white with fear, and his knees were +shaking as he stood between the two soldiers +who held him. When all had entered, <ins class="correction" title="Transcriber's Note: The original text reads 'Anahauc'">Anahuac</ins> +came and prostrated himself before me and +said,—</p> + +<p>'The commands of the Son of the Sun are +obeyed. All are here, and the door is shut.'</p> + +<p>Before I answered him, I called Francis Hartness +to me and said,—</p> + +<p>'Come here and stand by me, my friend, for +I shall need your counsel.'</p> + +<p>He came and stood by me on my right +hand, saying as he looked still wonderingly +at me,—</p> + +<p>'This means treachery, I suppose, and after +that, tragedy. Is that why you left Ruth and +Golden Star in the Fortress? I am afraid you +had only too much reason to, but I hope, for +Ruth's sake, you will do justice with as much +mercy as you can.'</p> + +<p>'You shall see,' I answered. 'But if it +were not for her you would see justice without +mercy.'</p> + +<p>Then I bade Anahuac rise, and told him<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span> +and Tupac to unbind the eyes of Djama and +the professor and bring them before me.</p> + +<p>As Djama's eyes opened to the light, he +stared about him in silence for a moment. His +face was very pale, and his lips were twitching +and trembling. The professor, too, looked about +him, also wondering greatly at what he saw; +but neither of them spoke till they had been +led forward and stood before me. Then, while +Djama still kept silence, the professor, looking +from me to Hartness, said in a voice that had +much wonder, but no fear or sign of guilt, +in it,—</p> + +<p>'What is this? What does all this mean? +What are all these soldiers here for, Vilcaroya? +I thought it was so important that all this +should be kept secret? Surely no one has +betrayed you already? But no, that can't be. +Hartness, what does it all mean?'</p> + +<p>'It means—first,' I said, speaking very slowly, +and not in a loud voice, 'that you have been +brought here with Laurens Djama to take the +oath which you agreed to take—never to reveal +the secrets of the things that you have learned. +I ask your pardon for the rude way in which +my people have brought you, but it was +necessary.'</p> + +<p>Then I turned to Djama, who was standing +silent and motionless, with clenched teeth and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span> +set face, like one who knows that he stands +near his doom and has no hope of mercy, +and said,—</p> + +<p>'Now, Laurens Djama, are you ready to do +as you promised to do when I told you that I +would give you the half of this gold for what +you have done for me and Golden Star? Are +you ready to swear the oath here, in the +presence of these witnesses, that you swore to +me then?'</p> + +<p>He drew himself up and looked at me boldly—for +he was a brave man although his heart +was black—and said to me with a hard, harsh +laugh in his voice,—</p> + +<p>'You have been too clever for me, and so I +suppose you have the right to mock me. There +is no need to go on with this farce. The sight +of your treasures gave me the gold-fever, I +suppose, and it drove me mad, as it has driven +many others mad, and I betrayed you. There +is no use saying any more. I see that I +have been betrayed too, and that my life is +in your hands, so I need only say that I +keep the right of taking it myself in my own +way.'</p> + +<p>'There is no need for that yet,' I said, 'and +others are concerned in this besides you.'</p> + +<p>Then I turned from him to Francis Hartness +and said,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'I cannot speak the Spanish speech, and I +would not if I could. Do you therefore speak +to the Spaniard yonder, and bid him say how +he came to be here with his soldiers. Tell +him, too, that if he lies, or refuses to speak, he +shall be buried in the gold he came to steal +until the weight of it crushes his life out. But +say to him that if he speaks the truth and +holds nothing back and does as I shall bid him, +he shall have his life, and afterwards as much +gold as three men can carry.'</p> + +<p>So then Francis Hartness turned to the +trembling Spaniard and questioned him, and he +confessed freely as soon as he knew he was +not to be killed, and told how Djama had gone +to the Governor of Cuzco and told him of my +coming and of a great treasure that he would +show him, and of others that I knew the secret +of and might be made to reveal, and how he +had bargained that half of all that was found +should be his and the other half the Governor's, +if he would help him to carry it to the coast +in safety and put it on a steamer. The Spaniard +told also how the Governor, who was his own +father, had only half believed this story, and +had bidden him bring a company of soldiers +to the appointed place and see if there was +any truth in Djama's story, and, if he found +there was, to take Djama and all of us prisoners<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span> +and carry us back to Cuzco, and put us into +the prison until he could question us the next +day.</p> + +<p>When he had finished, Djama laughed again +and said,—</p> + +<p>'There's the honour of a Peruvian! Serve +me right for being such a fool as to trust +to it!'</p> + +<p>But I bade him sternly to hold his peace +till he should be told to speak, and then, when +Francis Hartness had told me in English what +the Spaniard had said, I bade Tupac and +Anahuac stand forward and tell of their share +in what had been done, so that all might +understand. They told their story in Quichua, +and when I translated it into English to Francis +Hartness I made few words of it, of which the +meaning was this,—</p> + +<p>Ever since Tupac and his comrades had +recognised me as their lord, and sworn their +faith to me, they, and others whom they +trusted, had industriously spread abroad the +news of my coming—though telling nothing +that would make a traitor able to betray us—and, +in proof of their story, little wedges of +gold, stamped with the ancient symbol of the +Sun, had been passed from hand to hand as +earnest of my promise that I would use the +hidden treasures of the Incas for the benefit of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span> +my people, and make money of gold where +now there was only silver and copper.</p> + +<p>By this time, not only had the golden wedges +gone far and wide through the land, but +nearly all the soldiers of the pure Indian blood +had been won over to my cause, for, as I have +said, and as everyone in the country knows, +these soldiers are treated with great hardness +by their Spanish masters, who often pay them +nothing for many weeks or months together, +and give them scanty food and hard usage, +and cast them into prison or flog them and +shoot them if they think to do anything to +get justice. Moreover, there are always factions +of men they call politicians scheming +for power and setting the soldiers fighting +against one another and against their countrymen +for no benefit to themselves. So what +Francis Hartness had told me on the night +that Golden Star had come back to life had +already begun to come true. More than +half the garrison of Cuzco had already been +won over, and only waited for the signal +which should bid the whole Indian population +of the valley to rise and seize the arms +and ammunition in the city, and make the +officers and the Governor and all the officials +prisoners.</p> + +<p>Anahuac's daughter was a servant in the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span> +Governor's house, and this girl understood +Spanish, though she pretended only to know +Quichua and the dialect of the people, and she +had been set to watch,<a name="FNanchor_E_" id="FNanchor_E_"></a><a href="#Footnote_E_" class="fnanchor">[E]</a> and Tupac's eldest +son had also been secretly watching all the +comings and goings of Djama since we came +to Cuzco. In this way his visit to the Governor +had been made known to me, and then one +of the soldiers in the company that had been +ordered to go with the Governor's son to the +Rodadero had told Tupac of the order, and I +had arranged with him how the surprise was +to be carried out, and this, as you have seen, +had been done with complete success.</p> + +<p>When I had finished telling this to Hartness +I turned to the professor and said to him +kindly,—</p> + +<p>'There has been nothing said that brings +any share of the guilt of this treason to you, +so now, if you will promise me on your faith +and honour as an Englishman to keep my +secrets and obey such commands as I shall +put upon you for your own safety and +that of all of us, you shall go free, and you +shall have the choice of going back to England +or to any other country until the war is over, +or of staying here under my protection until<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span> +you can go away safely with the treasure which +shall be yours. But if you go now you cannot +take it with you, for in a few days from +now there will be war throughout the whole +land, and it would be impossible to take so +much treasure to the coast. Now, what do you +say?'</p> + +<p>He thought for a moment and then said,—</p> + +<p>'I am not a man of war, as you know +Vilcaroya, but I hope I am a man of honour. +I have never breathed a syllable that could +have given anyone an inkling of your secret, +and I promise you solemnly that I never will. +What Djama has done distresses me even more +than it amazes me. I would have staked my +life on his honesty, and if you will release him +and let him come with me—'</p> + +<p>'No, no, my friend!' I said, quickly and +sternly. 'What you would ask is impossible. +His aims were deeper and his sin was blacker +than it has been shown to be here. He did +not betray us for gold alone, for he knew that +I would keep my promise and give him more +than he could want. He would have given me +to my enemies to be killed—it might have been +by tortures, to make me say where my treasures +were hidden—so that he might have had Golden +Star at his mercy.'</p> + +<p>'It was your own fault, curse you! Why<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span> +did you not give her to me?' Djama cried +suddenly, breaking loose from the two who held +his arms and putting his hand to his pistol +pocket. The next instant my own revolver +was out from under my cloak and levelled at +his heart.</p> + +<p>'Another motion and I will kill you,' I said, +'though so quick a death would be too good +for you. Tie his hands behind his back and +hold him faster this time. Give me his pistol.'</p> + +<p>Before I had done speaking they had seized +him again in spite of his struggles, and paying +no heed to his cries and imprecations—for by +this time his long-pent-up passion had broken +loose and made him almost mad, and when +they had given me his pistol I said to him,—</p> + +<p>'I told you that Golden Star should be yours +if you could win her as an honest man. But +you sought to steal her as you would have +stolen my gold. That is enough; keep silence +now, or you shall be gagged.'</p> + +<p>Then I held out my hand to the professor +and said,—</p> + +<p>'I will accept your promise, for you are an +honest man. There is my hand. Now we +will be friends as before, and I will answer +for your safety. Will you go or stay with us?'</p> + +<p>'I will stay,' he said, 'for my studies are not +completed yet, and besides, I am anxious to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span> +see what the Inca empire will be like when it +is restored.'</p> + +<p>'I am glad that you say so,' I replied, 'for +you are welcome, and you shall make your +home here always if you will.'</p> + +<p>Then I bade them stand the Spanish officer +in the professor's place beside Djama, and, +turning to Francis Hartness, said,—</p> + +<p>'These men are worthy of death, for they +would have delivered us to death, but I cannot +kill Djama since Joyful Star might hate +me for it, and if I do not kill him it would +not be justice to kill the Spaniard. What +shall I do?'</p> + +<p>'I see nothing for it,' he said, after thinking +awhile, 'but shutting them up safely until +we have got this business over, and then sending +them out of the country and forbidding them +to come back under pain of death. There are +plenty of places that they would be perfectly +safe in.'</p> + +<p>'That is well thought of, my friend,' I said, +'and it shall be done. They came for gold and +they shall have it. They shall live in it, and +see gold, and nothing but gold, till the sight of +it is hateful to them. They shall have a prison +of gold, and eat and drink from gold, and sleep +and walk and sit on gold. Yes, truly, they +shall have enough of gold before they see the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span> +light of day again. Now tell the Spaniard what +I have said.'</p> + +<p>He did so, and at first the wretch's eyes glittered +and then grew dim when the true meaning of his +doom came upon him, for it meant he knew +not how long an imprisonment with a man who +had betrayed his friends, and whom, as he had +confessed, he would himself have betrayed; and +he thought, too, that I had only promised him +his life and the gold to make him speak, and that +now I would keep him prisoner and perhaps kill +him in the end. So he fell on his knees, like +the craven that he was, and begged for mercy, +and told Hartness of my promise, and with +Hartness's lips I told him only that he must +have patience and wait until it was my pleasure +to do what I had said.</p> + +<p>After this I called Tupac and Anahuac and +told them what I wished done, and they took a +score of their men and forthwith began to build, in +a corner of the hall beside the throne, a chamber +measuring some ten feet each way, of the oblong +blocks of gold which were piled up in the pyramid, +and while they were doing this I called the soldiers +before me and told them, speaking in their own +dialect, that if they were faithful to me until the +end of the war, each man should have one ounce +weight of gold paid to him every month, and one +ounce more for each of his comrades that he could<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span> +persuade to join us, and for this night's work I +would give them each a wedge of gold of the +weight of two ounces, which was more money +than all that they had earned in their lives +before; and when I had promised this they +went on their knees and swore faith to me and +destruction to their hated Spanish masters.</p> + +<p>Then I told them how Francis Hartness would +lead them to battle and to victory as he had led +the soldiers of his own nation, and after that he +spoke to them in Spanish, and told them what +to tell their comrades and what was to be done +with the arms and ammunition when the signal +for the rising was given.</p> + +<p>All this while Djama and the Spaniard were +kept standing watching the building of their +golden prison-cell. The men worked swiftly, +and the many hands made the toil light, and +they built the walls up very thick and strong, +fitting the golden bricks closely into each other, +and making the walls smooth and without hand +or foot-hold, so that neither could any of the +bricks be got out, nor the walls be climbed. +The cell was divided into two by another wall, +and when the walls were finished they were +about ten feet high, and there was an opening +into each cell in front, large enough for a man +to crawl in on his hands and knees.</p> + +<p>When all was ready I said to Djama,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'There is your house of gold. Go and dwell +in it till it shall be safe for me to release you. +Every day, as I have said, you shall eat and +drink from plates and cups of gold, and you +shall dream of gold until this gold-fever of +yours is cured.'</p> + +<p>'Until I have gone gold-mad, you mean!' he +cried, snarling at me like an angry dog. 'It is +just such a vengeance as a half-civilised savage +would have thought of. You know as well as +I do that I shall go mad in there unless I kill +myself first.'</p> + +<p>'You have your choice!' I said. 'I will make +your punishment no lighter. If you think to +pull the walls down they will fall on you and +crush you, and you will be buried in gold, and +if I am told that you have tried to break out, I +will put chains of gold on you, so heavy +that you shall not be able to drag them across +your cell; but if you are peaceful and patient, +all your wants shall be attended to by those +that I shall appoint, and you shall have everything +but liberty and the light of day. Now, +go in.'</p> + +<p>'I won't!' he cried with a curse that ended in +a scream. 'I shall go mad in there, I tell you, +and that is a thousand times worse than death +to me. I won't! Damn you, I won't!'</p> + +<p>'Then you shall be thrust in,' I said.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span></p> + +<p>I made a sign to those who held him, and they, +seeing what I meant, took him by the body and +the legs, and carried him, feet foremost, kicking +and struggling, towards the hole. Then they thrust +him in with his arms still bound. But when he +was half-way through, I bade one of them loose +the cords a little, so that he could free himself +afterwards. The Spaniard made no resistance, +and when he was bidden crept, trembling like a +hound that has been flogged, into his cell, and +when they were both in I ordered the openings +to be built up.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px;"><a name="They_thrust_him_in_with_his_arms_still_bound" id="They_thrust_him_in_with_his_arms_still_bound"></a> +<img src="images/illus4.jpg" width="395" height="600" alt="They thrust him in with his arms still bound." title="They thrust him in with his arms still bound." /> +<span class="caption">They thrust him in with his arms still bound.</span> +</div> + +<p>Francis Hartness and the professor had gone +away to the other end of the hall, not liking to +see this, and yet knowing that it would be useless +to seek to persuade me to more mercy.</p> + +<p>'Our work here is done now,' I said, going to +them, 'and it would be well for us to go back +to the fortress and sleep, for the morning is +near and there will be much work to do before +long.'</p> + +<p>'I don't think I shall sleep much after what I +have seen to-night,' said Hartness, 'and if I did +sleep I think I should dream of that golden prison +and those two poor wretches hungering and thirsting +for daylight and liberty, with the means of +buying any luxury the world could give them +within reach of their hands.'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' said the professor, 'it is a curious situa<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span>tion, +isn't it?—quite apart from the personal +interest it has for us. Now, in England or +America, a room built with walls and floor of +solid gold would be a luxury that only a +millionaire could afford, and he would probably +be thought a fool for building it, and yet here +it is only a prison in which a man might well +starve to death. Come, let us get away from +here. I really don't want to hear any more of +Djama's ravings than I can help. Good heavens! +who ever would have thought that a man of +his culture and learning and strength of mind +could possibly have made such a blackguard of +himself!'</p> + +<p>'Well,' said Hartness, with a dry sort of laugh, +'you see he was the victim of the two passions +that have done most to drive men mad or make +scoundrels of them since the world began—the +love of woman and the lust for gold. I don't +pretend to understand it myself, because he had +gold enough promised to him, and there is no +telling but that he might have won the woman; +but there, you never can tell how far any man is +mad or sane until he's tried.'</p> + +<p>'But there was something else, my friend,' I +said. 'There was, as you say, lust of gold and +love of woman; but there was also hate. Why, +I know not; but though I owe my new life to +that man, I have hated him and he has hated me<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span> +since we learnt to know each other as living men. +You know, too, how, as I told you, Golden Star +shrank from him as though he had been a poisonous +reptile, and yet why should I hate him and +yet love her who is of the same flesh and blood +as he is?'</p> + +<p>'I would rather discuss the problem in the +open air or at the hacienda than here,' said the +professor, 'and even then I don't suppose we +should get much nearer to a solution, for these +things are mysteries and mostly past finding out. +Yet it may be that you and he, the sons of +different centuries, may actually have embodied +in you the differences and the antipathies of +the two ages and the two races to which you +belong. There is no telling. But come, let us +get out of here, please. I really can't stand this +any longer.'</p> + +<p>'Nor I,' said Hartness. 'For goodness' sake +let us go! This is a good deal more trying to +the nerves than a cavalry charge or a smart +skirmish.'</p> + +<p>'Very well,' I said, 'we will go.'</p> + +<p>Then I called to Tupac and bade him tell the +soldiers and the rest that the night's work was +over and it was time to go. We gave each of the +soldiers his wedge of gold, as I had promised +them; and once more I made them swear that +each would kill any of the others who thought<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span> +to betray us. Then Tupac and Anahuac went +and opened the stone door, and we returned +from the Hall of Gold to the upper earth, +leaving Djama and his fellow traitor still raving +and crying within the walls of their golden +prison.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span></p> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_D_" id="Footnote_D_"></a><a href="#FNanchor_D_"><span class="label">[D]</span></a> The Inca naturally does not distinguish between the modern +Peruvians and their Spanish ancestors.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_E_" id="Footnote_E_"></a><a href="#FNanchor_E_"><span class="label">[E]</span></a> This is quite a common thing in Peru, and the Indian women +make exceedingly clever spies.</p></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER X</h3> + +<h3>ON THE RODADERO</h3> + + +<p>Francis Hartness and I came last out of +the passage, and I asked him to lead the +soldiers out of the hollow and across the plain +to the wall of the Sacsahuaman, where I would +join them, and as soon as they had gone out +of the hollow and were lost to sight I went +to the hole among the bushes where the hidden +stone was and released the chain and let +the water flow back into its old place, till the +entrance to the Hall of Gold was only the +same dark, stagnant pool that any wanderer +might find at the bottom of the cloven stairway.</p> + +<p>Then I strewed the earth over the hole, and +piled the stones and brushwood round and +over it as before, and went away to join the +others. I found them standing in a group in +one of the angles of the great fortress, and there<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span> +I spoke to the soldiers again, and told them +how much depended, both for themselves and +for the country, on their fidelity, promising +them peace and prosperity and freedom if they +were faithful, and a speedy death if they betrayed +me.</p> + +<p>After this I told them what story they should +tell when they went back to the city—how +their Indian guide had led them into the +entrance to a cavern in the mountain, their +officer going first and he following, and how, +when these two were going on with a single +light, some two or three yards ahead of them +a great slab of stone had suddenly fallen down +between them, closing the passage, and how +water had risen up and filled the passage at +its lower end, forcing them to run back out of +it for fear of being drowned; and I further +gave them permission to bring any who disbelieved +them to the mouth of the cleft +under the Sayacusca and show them the water +that they would find at the bottom of it, but to +take good care to send me warning of anyone +going there.</p> + +<p>This they promised to do, and still full of +wonder, and yet pleased with the gold they had +got and the promises I had made to them, they +made a loyal farewell, and marched down +through the Gate of Sand, and went back to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span> +the city to tell their story and do the work +that I had bidden them do.</p> + +<p>When they had gone I sent some of my men +to see that none of them turned back, and dismissed +the rest to their homes, saving only +Tupac, Anahuac, and Ainu and three others +who could be trusted in all things; and with +these we went back into the underground +chambers of the fortress by the way that we +had left them.</p> + +<p>When we got back to the throne-room I +sent all but Tupac away to remove the beasts +from the stables and take them to the hacienda, +so that the next night, under cover of the +darkness, they could return and bring us food +and drink and clothing and other things that +we needed, for now that matters had gone so +far it would not be safe for us to live at the +hacienda or be seen in any place known to the +Spaniards until the time was ripe for the striking +of the first blow.</p> + +<p>When they were gone we ate and drank a +little of what we had brought with us in the +morning, and then lay down, either to sleep or +to think of the strange things that had happened +and of what was now quickly coming to +pass.</p> + +<p>As for me, no sleep came to my eyes, for +I knew that when Joyful Star awoke I should<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span> +have to tell her at least something of what her +brother had done and of what had happened +to him, and a grievous task it was, you may +be sure, when I came to the doing of it, as I +did not many hours afterwards.</p> + +<p>The first thing she asked me when she found +that Djama was not with us was what had +become of him, and then, knowing that sooner +or later the bitter truth had to be told, I told +her as gently as I was able, and hiding from +her all that I could without lying to her. My +words struck her dumb with horror and amazement, +and if it had not been that Francis +Hartness and the professor were there, and told +her that they had seen and heard with their +own eyes and ears the truth of all that I said, +I do not think she would have believed me. +But when at last she could no longer doubt +the story of her brother's crime and treachery, +she came to me and laid her hand upon my +arm, and looked up at me with tearful eyes +and said,—</p> + +<p>'But you will not kill him, Vilcaroya, for my +sake, will you? He is my brother, you know, +after all, though he has made me almost ashamed +to say so. You must protect yourself, of course, +and your people from treachery, but you will +not kill him, will you?'</p> + +<p>'He is alive now,' I said, 'because he is Joy<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span>ful +Star's brother, not because I think he is +worthy to live, for he would have betrayed one +life that he gave back, and stained the other +with infamy. But I have given my word, and +he shall live, and when he can do no more +harm I will pardon him, and he shall go back +to his own country in safety. More than that +I cannot promise even to you.'</p> + +<p>'It is all that I can ask for,' she said, 'and +more than he could expect after what he has +done. But, oh! why should he have brought +such a shame as this upon us?'</p> + +<p>'Upon himself only,' I said. It would not be +possible for such a thing as shame to touch you.'</p> + +<p>She looked up at me again and smiled through +her tears, as if my words had pleased her well, +and that smile of hers was more to me than +even her tears. Then she went back to the little +chamber where she had slept, and presently +returned leading Golden Star by the hand, and +then we all sat down in the silver seats and +talked of the wonderful things that had happened, +and I told Golden Star all the story of my own +return to life, and hers, and what I knew of +the changes that had happened in the world since +she and I had said our last words to each +other in the Sanctuary of the Sun; and then +I set her talking with the others, translating +for her and for them as well as I could, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span> +she, knowing nothing of what had happened in +the night, and being glad that Evil Eyes, as +she called Djama in our own speech, had gone +away for a long time, was as happy as a child +amongst us, and soon even Ruth became more +cheerful and began to try and make her say +words of English and repeat her name and the +professor's and Francis Hartness's after her, for +she already loved her dearly, and, even in the +midst of her own sorrow, she was rejoiced that +the soul which had slept had been so happily +re-awakened in her.</p> + +<p>After this, Francis Hartness and I began to +talk our plans over again, and to discuss the +chances of the revolt in Cuzco, and I showed him +how, with the help of my people, I would the next +day cut off all communication between the valley +and the rest of the country until our work was +finished there, for I was determined that the +first part of the empire of my fathers' that I +would re-take should be the City of the Sun +itself and the region that it commanded, since I +knew that my people still looked upon it as the +most sacred spot on earth, and would fight better +to take it than any other place. And in this +plan Francis Hartness, looking at the matter as +a soldier, also agreed with me.</p> + +<p>We thought it best that none of us should show +ourselves in the open that day, for we knew not<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span> +what the effect of the soldiers' story and their +return without their officer might be in Cuzco, for +if it had become widely known, it would certainly +bring many people up to the Rodadero to behold +the scene of so strange an occurrence. So we +spent the day in conversation, and, which was +more interesting to my companions, in exploring +the maze of chambers and passages and winding +galleries which the labour of many thousands of +men had wrought out of the solid rock in the +days of my ancestors, for you must know that in +those days the fortress of the Sacsahuaman was +crowned with a great palace, which was the +strongest place in all the Land of the Four +Regions, and so here were stored very great +treasures, not only of gold and silver and precious +stones, but also weapons and armour and most +finely-woven cloths of the purest wool of the +Vicuña, which is softer than silk, brilliantly dyed +and embroidered with gems and threads of gold, +and the imperial robes that had been worn by +twenty generations of Incas, many sets of each, +since nothing that had belonged to one Inca +might ever be used by another after his death.</p> + +<p>Among these were found many sets of the +royal robes of the Coyas or queen-wives of the +Incas, and I took Golden Star aside and told her +to take two of these and to clothe herself in one +and Joyful Star in the other, so that we might<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span> +see our two Inca princesses side by side as they +might have looked in the days of the past, and +she fell in with my humour, laughing and clapping +her hands like a delighted child.</p> + +<p>So she took the robes and led Joyful Star away +with her to their own chamber, talking to her in +her soft, musical speech, though she knew she +could not understand her, and yet making so +many pretty signs and eloquent gestures that +Ruth, forgetting her sorrow for the time, comprehended +her, and entered into the spirit of the play, +and soon they came back to us into the throne-room, +clad exactly alike, and so perfectly resembling +each other, save for the contrast of the blue +eyes and the brown, and the bright hair and the +dark, that they could have been taken for nothing +save twin daughters of the Sun and the fairest of +his children; and Tupac and the two men that +I had kept in the fortress to attend to our +wants fell on their knees before them as they +passed, as though they would have worshipped +them.</p> + +<p>It was at this time, and while we were passing +the hours in this fashion, that Golden Star did +something that gave me great joy and a bright +hope for the future. I had been telling her of +the wonderful country that I had returned to life +in, and of the marvellous things that I had seen +there, and this, she knew already, was the country<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span> +of Francis Hartness. So, as he came from such +a wonderful land, she thought, in the innocence +of her old-world simplicity, that he was one of +a new race of beings that came on to the earth +since our days, and when I told her he was but +human like ourselves, though very strong and +learned and skilled in many things that we +knew nothing of, she said to me, just as a sister +might say to a brother from whom she had no +secrets,—</p> + +<p>'He is rather, in my eyes, like a son of our +Father who has come to earth from the Mansions +of the Sun; yet I am very glad that he is not, +and that he is a man such as you are, my brother, +and when Joyful Star has taught me the speech +of her people I will talk with him, and then I +think life will be better for me, for even now, +though I cannot understand his words, his voice +sounds like music to me, and when he looks at +me he makes me try to remember something +that was in my other life, and I have forgotten. +What is it, I wonder?'</p> + +<p>I looked down into her eyes and saw the untroubled +serenity of her soul reflected in them. +There was no flush on her cheeks, and her lips +were smiling as they could not have smiled had +she known how I could have answered that +question for her. I stooped and kissed her +brow and said,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'I might guess what it is, Golden Star, but +I could not tell you. Yet I pray that our +Father the Sun may put it into the heart +of my friend to teach you what I see now you +can only learn from him.'</p> + +<p>More than this I would not tell her, though +she questioned me sharply. But the next time +that Francis Hartness spoke to her through my +lips she looked up at him, and a little flush +came to her cheeks, and a smile to her lips, +and I saw his eyes brighten, and the colour +deepen ever so little under the bronze of his +skin.</p> + +<p>Then I looked at Joyful Star and saw something +shining in her eyes too, and as she caught +my glance she smiled ever so little and said, +when I had finished speaking for him,—</p> + +<p>'Vilcaroya is an excellent interpreter, I've no +doubt; but don't you think, Captain Hartness, +it would be very much more interesting if you +could talk directly with Her Highness? You +know I'm teaching Golden Star English, and +Vilcaroya is teaching you Quichua—now, I +wonder which of you will be able to talk to +the other first?'</p> + +<p>He pulled his moustache and laughed, looking +at Golden Star the while, and said,—</p> + +<p>'Well, Her Highness has the advantage of +the easier language and the freshest, and I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span> +daresay the brightest intellect, but probably +for all that we shall begin with some delightful +jargon of both languages, and leave them to +sort themselves out as we go on. Still, as you +say, it will be more interesting than talking +through an interpreter.'</p> + +<p>'And I hope,' she said, with more meaning +in her voice than in her words, 'that you +will both of you find it as pleasant as it +will be interesting.'</p> + +<p>'Who knows!' he said, catching her meaning +and laughing again. 'She is most wonderfully +like you, Miss Ruth, isn't she?'</p> + +<p>'Yes, but—but I am not without hope that +you may some day compare us a little, just a +little, to my disadvantage.'</p> + +<p>What Francis Hartness would have said to +this I cannot say, though I do not think he +was displeased by Joyful Star's words, and yet +his face grew very serious as she spoke. But +just then Tupac came and told me that Anahuac +and Ainu had returned with the beasts, and +were now waiting outside the bronze doors. +From this we learnt that it was already night, +though, truth to tell, the time had passed so +quickly for us that I for one thought that it +was little more than late afternoon.</p> + +<p>Now, as I have said, I was the only one who +knew the secret of the bronze doors, and so I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span> +went back with Tupac and opened them, and, +when the men had entered, closed them +again.</p> + +<p>There were twelve of them beside Ainu and +Anahuac, and all were laden with food and +drink and clothing, and our arms and ammunition, +two repeating rifles and two revolvers for +each of us. When the men had laid their +burdens down, I called Anahuac to me, and +asked him if he had any news. He bowed +himself before me, and then, standing in front +of me as I sat in one of the seats, he +said,—</p> + +<p>'Yes, Lord. If the ears of the Son of the +Sun are open, his servant will fill them with +tidings of some moment.'</p> + +<p>'Say on,' I said, 'and meanwhile let a meal +be prepared for us, for we are hungry.'</p> + +<p>This I said to Tupac, and Golden Star, hearing +it, smiled, and took Ruth's hand and led +her to the boxes, making signs that they should +perform the housewife's duties together. Then +Anahuac began, and said,—</p> + +<p>'The ears of the Children of the Blood have +not been closed, nor have their eyes slept +throughout the Holy City and the Valley of the +Sun, and they have seen and heard much, and +the courage of their hearts has risen high, +and they are longing for the word of their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span> +Lord to break the yoke that is upon their +necks.</p> + +<p>'When the soldiers returned last night and +told the story that my Lord had put into their +mouths, there was great wonder among all the +other soldiers, and many saw in it a sign that +the Son of the Sun is mighty, and can do that +which he promises. But among the masters +who are set over the soldiers there was great +anger, and they sought, but without avail, to +keep the news from being made public in the +city; but the Men of the Blood took care that +this should not be so, and to-day all Cuzco has +been talking of the strange fate of the Coronel +Prada, the son of Don Antonio Prada, the +governor. But Don Antonio himself had gone +the day before to a hacienda near Oropesa, and +messengers have been sent to him to tell him the +story, and this evening he rode back with all +haste to the city.</p> + +<p>'He has ordered that to-night sentries shall +be posted at all the approaches to the Rodadero +and round the Sayacusca, so that none may +come or go without his knowledge, and to-morrow +he will come himself with many officers +and two hundred soldiers, and the thing they +call dynamite, that he may rend the Sayacusca +in pieces, and find, as he thinks, the place where +his son has been hidden.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span></p> + +<p>'And the soldiers—what of them?' I asked. +'Will they be for us or against us?'</p> + +<p>'There will be many in the service of my +Lord, and if it shall be possible there shall be +more of these than of the others, for those who +were in the Hall of Gold last night have been +busy in the hope of my Lord's further bounty, +and many have been tempted with the promise +of gold and freedom; but still there will be +many that may not be trusted, and all the +officers of the Governor will be Spaniards.'</p> + +<p>'And therefore enemies,' I said, when he had +finished his story, and stood waiting for me to +speak.</p> + +<p>I told Francis Hartness at once what Anahuac +had said, and we debated for a short time on +what we should do. Then I called Tupac, and +he came and stood beside Anahuac, and I said +to them,—</p> + +<p>'These things have happened well for us, and +now we must act quickly, so that we may take +the best advantage of them. When you go +hence, take with you twenty strips of the scarlet +fringe in token of my authority, and give these +to twenty of the best of the Men of the Blood, +and let them go with all speed and silence +through the towns and villages of the valley, +and say that the Son of the Sun has come, +and is about to stretch forth his hand and take<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span> +that which was his again. Further, let every +entrance to the valley be closed. Let the bridge +over the Great Speaker be cut with all speed +that may be. Let none pass in or out of the +gateway of Piquillacta, and let all the mountain +paths be broken down or blocked, so that +none may know what is happening in the +valley, nor any news be carried hence into the +country.</p> + +<p>'Let every hacienda, whose master is a +Spaniard, be given to the flames, but let no +one else be injured. Let none of the strangers +be hurt, and let their goods be sacred. Let all +of the sentries who will not serve us be disarmed +or slain silently by the others, and this +before midnight, and let those who are for us—who +shall come with the Governor to-morrow—make +ready to do quickly that which shall be +commanded them. The password for those who +are with us will be "Vilcaroya." The rest I will +do with my own hands and the help of my +friend. I have spoken—let me be obeyed +quickly!'</p> + +<p>Then they bent low before me and went to +make ready to do what I had bidden them.</p> + +<p>It was then about eight o'clock at night, and +after we had had our evening meal we waited +until it was nearly eleven, making perfect our +plans, and then, when Ruth and Golden Star had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span> +gone to rest without knowing of the work which +we had in hand—for we had kept it from them +lest they should be anxious for us—Francis +Hartness and I armed ourselves, after I had +disguised him as well as I could to make him +look like an Indian, and we said good-night to +the professor and left the fortress by the same +way that we had left it the night before.</p> + +<p>As soon as we got out into the open air we +made our way stealthily back towards the +Rodadero, until I caught sight of a sentry +standing near one of the carved stones.</p> + +<p>'I will go and see whether this is a friend or +a foe,' I whispered. 'Wait here and cover him +with your rifle, but do not fire unless you hear +me whistle.'</p> + +<p>'Very well,' he said; 'but take care of yourself, +for those Mannlicher bullets make a very +ugly wound.'</p> + +<p>I waved my hand to him in reply, and went +away towards the sentry, keeping a good lookout +for others who might be about. I had in +my belt a long, heavy-bladed knife, and this I +loosened in the sheath as I came near to him. +I got within earshot of him unseen, and then, +rising to my feet behind him, I said in a low +voice, but loud enough for him to hear,—</p> + +<p>'Vilcaroya—friend or foe?'</p> + +<p>'<i>Halta! quien va?</i>'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span></p> + +<p>The words in the hated Spanish speech told +me that he was a foe. As he faced about, +bringing his rifle to the ready, I drew my knife +and, before he could take aim, sent it whistling +through the air with such force and so true an +aim that it took him in the windpipe and half +buried its blade in his neck. That was one +of the tricks of our old warfare which, with +many others, I had taken good care not to +forget.</p> + +<p>He dropped his rifle and clasped his hands +to his throat and fell without a sound. I crept +swiftly forward, pulled the knife out of his throat +and drove it into his heart. Then I quickly took +off his cartridge-belt and long coat and cap, and +put them on. After that I took his rifle and +stood in his place for a little while, so that the +others might see me, and then walked back to +where I had left Hartness. When he saw me +coming, his rifle-barrel moved till it covered me, +and he said in English,—</p> + +<p>'Is that you, Vilcaroya?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said. 'The sentry was an enemy, and +I have killed him. Now I am going to take you +prisoner, as though I were the sentry, and so we +can go together and find the officer who commands +the sentries, and take him prisoner or +kill him.'</p> + +<p>'All right,' he said with a laugh. 'I surrender.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span> +This isn't quite what we call civilised warfare, +but I suppose it can't be helped.'</p> + +<p>We went back together to the place where the +sentry that I had killed had stood, and then we +saw two or three others coming in towards the +place, no doubt to see why the other sentry should +have left his post. I took Hartness's rifle out of +his hand, and, catching him by the arm, led him +to meet the nearest of them, as though I had +taken a prisoner. Within ten paces of them I +halted, and said,—</p> + +<p>'Is it Vilcaroya or Prada?'</p> + +<p>'Vilcaroya to a friend, Prada to an enemy,' he +answered, in the dialect in which I had addressed +him.</p> + +<p>'Then we are friends,' I said, taking off the +peaked cap that had belonged to the other sentry, +and showing him the long, straight, brown hair +that betokened my race. 'I am he who has +come back from the days that are dead—Vilcaroya, +the son of Huayna-Capac.'</p> + +<p>'And I am thy servant, Lord,' he said, bringing +his rifle-butt down between his feet, and bending +his head over the muzzle. 'I am one of those +who saw the glory of my Lord in the Hall of +Gold last night.'</p> + +<p>'Then thou art one of the faithful,' I said, +'for none have betrayed the secret or earned the +swift death that would have been theirs had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</a></span> +they done so. Now tell me, how many of +those who are on guard here to-night may be +trusted?'</p> + +<p>'There are twenty of us here, Lord, not counting +the officer in command.'</p> + +<p>'Nay,' I said, interrupting him, 'there are but +nineteen, for he who wore this coat and carried +this rifle was an enemy, and I have killed him, +as I would have killed thee hadst thou been an +enemy. Now, of these nineteen, how many may +I trust?'</p> + +<p>'There are but five who may not be trusted, not +counting the officer, and he is a Spaniard, and +must be killed.'</p> + +<p>'That is good,' I said, for the tone in which he +had said these last words had pleased me well. +'Now this man with me is my faithful friend, and +one who will fight well for me and my people. +Go on the other side of him, and we will take him +as a prisoner to the officer. Then thou shalt see +how Vilcaroya deals with his enemies.'</p> + +<p>He bent his head in assent, and took his place +beside Hartness, and as we marched away Hartness +said to me,—</p> + +<p>'I don't think I shall have much to teach you +in strategy, Vilcaroya, but I must say that I would +rather have a stand-up fight than this kind of +thing.'</p> + +<p>'It is not like what you have told me of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</a></span> +warfare of the English,' I said, 'yet if it has to be +it must be. Let us get it over.'</p> + +<p>So we marched him between us across the plain, +and when we got between the wall of the fortress +and the carved stone that they called the Inca's +Seat, we saw the officer who was in command of +the sentries walking, with two soldiers beside him, +from post to post, seeing that the sentries were +awake and keeping proper watch. We went to +meet him, and halted ten paces from him at his +command. I had told the sentry to reply for me, +and he answered the officer's hail and said,—</p> + +<p>'Vilcaroya!—a prisoner.'</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 397px;"><a name="Illustration_It_had_smitten_him_to_the_heart" id="Illustration_It_had_smitten_him_to_the_heart"></a> +<img src="images/illus5.jpg" width="397" height="600" alt="It had smitten him to the heart." title="It had smitten him to the heart." /> +<span class="caption">It had smitten him to the heart.</span> +</div> + +<p>As the first words left his lips the two soldiers +repeated the password and made with their rifles +the movement that is called the salute. My knife +was already in my hand, and as the officer gave +a command in Spanish, it flashed once in the +starlight and the next instant was buried to the +hilt in his breast. He fell, as the sentry had done, +without a cry, for it had smitten him to the heart, +dead as though he had been struck by a lightning +bolt. The others stared at his fallen body, dumb +with amazement, and I heard Hartness utter a +sound that might have been one either of horror +or of wonder; but I had no time to take heed +of this, so I instantly ordered the two soldiers +to take the officer's uniform off his body, and then +I said to Hartness,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Now, you can speak Spanish and I cannot. +Take this Spaniard's uniform and his weapons, +and make yourself the officer of the guard, and +then you shall help me to set a trap that the +Governor shall find it a hard matter to escape +from.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER XI</h3> + +<h3>HOW WE TOOK THE CITY OF THE SUN</h3> + + +<p>Although Hartness was a much taller and +broader man than the Spaniard, his long, loose +overcoat fitted him well enough for the occasion, +and when he had put on his shako, and wrapped +his scarf about his neck so as to hide his fair beard, +he was disguised enough to pass in the darkness +for one of the enemy. We now took the two +soldiers who had been with the officer and visited +all the posts. We found four of the sentries who +could not return the password and were therefore +enemies. These we disarmed and bound instead +of killing them, for I could see that what I had +done had pleased my friend but little, though he +saw that in such a desperate venture as ours it +was necessary to use desperate measures.</p> + +<p>When we had gone the rounds and made sure +of all, we buried the two dead men, and took our +prisoners into one of the caves under the carved<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</a></span> +stones. Then I posted my men so as to guard all +the approaches from the city to the Rodadero, and +after that I went with Hartness to the hidden hole +by the Sayacusca, and showed him how the way to +the Hall of Gold was opened. I did this so that +the secret might be in good and safe hands if I +should fall in battle, and so that he should be able +to properly protect the welfare of Ruth and Golden +Star, and fulfil my promises to himself and the +professor.</p> + +<p>When I had turned the stone and showed him +the chain, I pulled it up and supported it as I had +done before, only this time I used the carbine +which had belonged to the sentry I had killed, and +to the stock of this I fastened a long rope which +Tupac had hidden there by my orders. This rope +I stretched out along the ground, hiding it as well +as I could, in a straight line away from the +Sayacusca. The end I led into the entrance of one +of the many passages or tunnels which ran under +the carved stones. By the time I had done this the +water had all flowed away, and Hartness said +to me,—</p> + +<p>'Are you going to leave the entrance to your +treasure-house open like that for His Excellency +to walk into to-morrow?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said, 'but it is only half open. Unless +the door below is open too there is no way out or +in save this and the channel through which the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</a></span> +waters flow, so that His Excellency will not find +much down there.'</p> + +<p>'I see,' he said, 'a trap, and not one that I +should care to see a friend of mine walk into. +But you don't mean to drown them all like rats +in a hole, do you?'</p> + +<p>'I cannot tell that yet,' I said. 'If we can take +them alive we may do so, but unless they yield to +us they shall yield to the water. Now, everything +is ready, and we have only to wait. Come and +sleep for a little and I will keep watch, and then +I will sleep and you shall watch. It will not be +daylight for six hours yet, and we can do nothing +more till then.'</p> + +<p>We went to the cavern in which I had hidden the +end of the rope, and he lay down on the soft, clean +sand, and, soldier-like, was fast asleep almost as +soon as he had lain down. I left him there, and +made the round of the guards and spoke with +the men, telling them as much as it was necessary +for them to know of my plans for the next day, +and allowed half of them to take two or three +hours' rest, with their arms ready at hand, while +the others watched, and then I went back to +Hartness and told him to wake me in three +hours, and soon was fast asleep in his place. +He came and woke me at daylight and told +me that everything was still quiet and that the +sentries were all in their places.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</a></span></p> + +<p>Then, when we had breakfasted on the food +that we had brought with us from the fortress, +we called in all the sentries save the two by +the Gate of Sand, and hid them among the +stones and bushes, all within an easy rifle-shot +of the entrance to the water-cavern. I bade +the two I had left by the gate tell the Governor +that all was well, and, when he had ridden by, +to mix with the soldiers and tell those who were +for me to separate from the others as soon as +they heard my signal-cry, and then to wait for +the English captain.</p> + +<p>For nearly an hour we sat and watched for +the coming of the enemy, and then at last we +saw a troop of horse come up out of the valley +round the end of the fortress. After them came +some officers on horseback, with the Governor +riding at their head, and then another troop of +horse, in all about three hundred men. The first +troop, led by the Governor and his officers, came +on towards the Sayacusca, and the others halted +and spread themselves out along the ridge that +runs round it. When they saw the empty hole +and the steps leading down into the darkness, +they all crowded round, peering down into it. +Then two lanterns were lighted and some of +them went down.</p> + +<p>They had all dismounted from their horses and +were indulging their curiosity without suspicion.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</a></span> +I waited till they were nearly all in my trap, +and then came the moment to close it. My +long, wailing cry rang out loud and shrill +through the hollow, and was taken up by my +men in hiding, and in an instant all was confusion. +I heard my name shouted from one +to the other, and saw more than half of the +troopers in the hollow leave their ranks and +gallop away towards the plain. Then I took +aim at a trooper who was watching the officer's +horses, and fired. The bullet struck his horse, +and it reared up and threw him, and then fell +and lay kicking on the ground. At this all the +others took fright and broke loose and galloped +away in all directions. At the same instant the +rifles of my men began cracking all round, and +saddle after saddle was emptied as the bullets +found their marks.</p> + +<p>'I'm going to catch one of those horses,' said +Hartness suddenly to me, 'then I'll ride out and +bring those other fellows up and show them +what to do. That'll be more in my line than +this sort of work. Good-bye; you will see or +hear of me again before long.'</p> + +<p>The next moment he was gone, and I had +not fired many more shots before I saw him, +mounted on one of the officers' horses, galloping +through the hollow towards the ridge. All this +time none of my men had shown themselves,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</a></span> +and the constant stream of shots coming from +all sides of them had thrown the Governor's +troops into utter confusion. The officers were +shouting orders which no one listened to, the +horses were galloping wildly about, rearing and +plunging with the pain of their wounds, and +many of the soldiers had already taken to flight, +believing, in their panic, that the hollow was full +of hidden enemies.</p> + +<p>We kept up the fire from our hiding-places +until we heard shouts and cheers coming from +the ridge, and I looked and saw Hartness with +a drawn sword in his hand, leading a body of +some hundred and fifty troopers down into the +hollow.</p> + +<p>Now I saw that we should be able to end the +battle quickly, so I sent up my signal-cry again +and called for my own men to come out. Then +I pulled the rope and released the chain, and +ran out towards my men, shouting to them to +close round the entrance to the water-cavern +and shoot all who tried to get out. Some three +or four sought to escape and were shot, and +then the rest, seeing my men running at them +with the bayonet, and the other troopers coming +up, led by a stranger, lost heart, and crowded +back into the cleft, firing their revolvers wildly +as they went.</p> + +<p>The next moment we heard cries of terror<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</a></span> +coming up out of the darkness, mingled with +the rushing of water, and the Governor, followed +by about six of his officers, came leaping up the +steps to find a line of bayonets drawn up across +the mouth. With the waters surging up behind +them, and the bayonets in front of them, +there was nothing for them but surrender or +death.</p> + +<p>Hartness, who had now dismounted, ordered +the men to fall back a pace, and, as they did so, +he went through the line with his sword in one +hand and a revolver in the other, and said to the +Governor,—</p> + +<p>'Señor, will you yield or go back down +yonder?'</p> + +<p>'We must yield,' said the Governor, 'since +there is no choice. But who are you, and what +are you, an Englishman, doing here in arms +against the Government?'</p> + +<p>'Who I am matters nothing just now,' he +replied, 'and as for your Government, it no longer +exists. That must be enough for you. Now, +señores, give up your swords and revolvers quietly +and no harm shall come to you. You, Señor +Prada, give your sword to this caballero here, +who is the Inca Vilcaroya and lawful ruler of +this country.'</p> + +<p>The Governor turned and stared at me, dumb +with amazement at these strange words, and all<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</a></span> +the others stared too, for, like him, they had no +doubt heard the legend of my strange fate. He +drew his sword, and as he did so I covered him +with my revolver, and extended my hand to take +it. He held the hilt out to me with a trembling +hand. I took it in silence, and then I turned +from him and said to my men,—</p> + +<p>'Bring these Spaniards out and bind them +safely, then follow me to the Seat of the +Incas.'</p> + +<p>When they saw that the victory was with us, +and that the Governor himself was our prisoner, +together with many of the chief of his officers, +those of the soldiers who had not been for me +when they came were glad enough now to secure +themselves by shouting my name and obeying my +orders, and when I moved away towards the seat, +they followed me, laughing and cheering, well +pleased to see their hated masters prisoners in +their midst.</p> + +<p>The great carved rock which is called the Inca's +Seat is, as I have already said, a great rounded +mass of stone rising up from the plain of the +Rodadero, and carved into many seats. On the +top there are three broad seats, the middle one +higher than all the rest, and it was here that my +forefathers had sat to watch the building of the +great fortress, and sometimes to give audience to +their people.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[Pg 238]</a></span></p> + +<p>Now I sat on it, and the soldiers drew themselves +up round the rock, with the prisoners in the +midst of them, and I spoke to them, and told +them freely of the strange things that had +happened to me, and how I had come back to +the Land of the Four Regions to drive out their +oppressors and restore the just and gentle rule +of my ancestors. Then I had the Governor +brought up and stood before me, and bade Francis +Hartness come and sit on my right hand and +speak to him for me, and by his lips I told him +that unless the city was surrendered to me before +evening he and all his officers should die, and all +the houses of the Spaniards in the city should be +given to the flames and no pity shown to any +man, woman or child of them, for as they had +treated my people so I had sworn to treat them +unless they yielded.</p> + +<p>You may think how troubled he was at hearing +such words as these, since he knew from what he +had seen that there was conspiracy and treachery +among his own men, and he had no knowledge of +how far this had gone, or which of his men he +could trust, and so this man, who but a few hours +before had been master of the whole valley, and +had looked upon the Indios, as he called them, +as little better than slaves, now answered me +humbly enough and prayed me not to murder +him when he was helpless in my power. And to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[Pg 239]</a></span> +this I answered him that the blood of my +people had been crying out for many generations +against his people, and that this was the +day not of mercy but of vengeance, and that I +would do as I had said unless the city were +delivered to me.</p> + +<p>Then I descended from the seat and mounted +the Governor's horse, and after I had sent a +company of twelve men to ride quickly down to +the city and go through all the streets, shouting +my name as a signal to tell my people that all +was well, and that the moment for them to rise +against their oppressors had come, I took my +place beside Hartness at the head of our little +army, and with our prisoners well guarded close +behind us we set out on our way back to +Cuzco.</p> + +<p>As we approached the city we heard the sound +of the church-bells being rung wildly, and looking +down, we could see the streets and squares full of +people, and as we got nearer still we heard the +cracking of rifles and the shouts and cries of men +in conflict.</p> + +<p>'There is either a fight or a riot going on down +there,' said Hartness to me, 'and if many of the +soldiers remain faithful to the Government there'll +be some bloodshed before to-night. Have you +any idea how many there are?'</p> + +<p>'There were more than two thousand soldiers in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[Pg 240]</a></span> +the city yesterday,' I said, 'and out of these +more than half have already taken my gold +and sworn faith to me. Of the rest many are +wavering, and when they see we have taken +the Governor prisoner I think they will come +over.'</p> + +<p>'Very likely,' he said; 'but how about those +machine-guns in the barracks? There are +three Gatlings and two Maxims, and if they +keep those and work them properly they'll +just sweep the streets and squares clear, you +know.'</p> + +<p>'I have promised fifty pounds' weight of gold +for each of them,' I said; 'and, more than +that, there should be no ammunition for them +by this time if what the sentries told us is +true.'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' he said, 'if we can get hold of that, or +even the best part of it, I don't think there will +be much danger. However, as everything depends +on that, I think we had better go straight to +the Cuartel first. If we have that we have +Cuzco.'</p> + +<p>We entered the city by the street of El Triunfo, +and made our way straight to the great Plaza. +As we rode along three abreast we were greeted +by joyful cries from the crowds of Indians who +parted to leave a way for us through the midst +of them. Tupac and his comrades had done<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[Pg 241]</a></span> +their work well, and all night the people had +been thronging into the city from the surrounding +country. All the shops and houses of the +Spaniards were already shut up, and although +none knew the truth of what was happening, all +thought that the revolution had already broken +out in Cuzco and so had made themselves as +safe as they could.</p> + +<p>A little way from the entrance to the great +square we came upon Tupac at the head of +some two hundred of the men of San Sebastian, +armed with knives and guns and pistols of all +sorts which they had taken during the night from +the towns and villages around, where they had +been doing the work I had bidden them do. +He told me that there were more than a thousand +soldiers in the city waiting only for me to show +myself to kill their officers and come over to +us, and that the others would fight without heart, +if they fought at all, now that the Governor was +taken—for half of the people of Cuzco were for +the Government and half for the Revolution, and +so the city would be divided against itself and +all would be confusion as soon as the fighting +began.</p> + +<p>He also told me that the official who is called +the Sub-Prefect had brought out two of the +machine-guns and had planted them at each +end of the terrace in front of the cathedral, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[Pg 242]</a></span> +made a proclamation that unless everyone left +the streets within an hour he would have them +cleared with bullets.</p> + +<p>When I told this to Hartness he said,—</p> + +<p>'Then we must have those two guns first. +Tell Tupac to break his men up into little +bands of about half-a-dozen each and send +them round into all the streets leading to the +square, and tell everyone that isn't armed to +keep out of the way if they don't want to +get hurt. Then you ride on with the prisoners +and a guard of fifty men, and let them be ready +to shoot sharply. Tell them to aim at the knees +and not to empty their magazines too fast. I'll +look after the guns. They won't fire on you for +fear of killing the Governor and the rest. Now, +forward!'</p> + +<p>I did as he said. Tupac's men broke up and +disappeared as though by magic. I took the +reins of the horse on which the Governor was +bound and bade half-a-dozen of my men to do +the same with the others. Then two and two +we trotted into the square, Tupac running along +by my horse's head. It was covered with groups +of people all talking and looking and pointing +about them, and on the terrace before the +cathedral there were two companies of soldiers, +one at each end, drawn up behind a machine-gun.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[Pg 243]</a></span></p> + +<p>As soon as the people saw me ride in with the +Governor bound beside me a great shout went +up and many came running towards me, but I +waved them back and shouted to them to leave +the square and guard all the streets leading +into it. I did this so that those who understood +me, and were therefore friends, might +escape out of harm's way before the guns began +to fire.</p> + +<p>Then I drew my revolver and put it to the +Governor's head and bade Tupac tell him to +order the men away from the guns, and +that if a shot was fired he should be the first +to die.</p> + +<p>So, as there was no help for it, he did so, and +called to the officers to come down and speak +with him, but instead of obeying they shouted +some orders to their men and I saw them making +ready to fire the guns, for, as we found out afterwards, +they were men who would have joined the +revolution when it broke out.</p> + +<p>But before the guns could be trained on us +Hartness's troop swung round into the square. +The twenty foot soldiers sent a volley along the +terrace, firing low as he had told them, and +killing and wounding nearly half of the men at +the guns. Then there came a rattling volley from +the cavalry and another from my own men, and +then, with a great shout and a clattering of hoofs,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[Pg 244]</a></span> +Hartness leapt his horse up the steps at the end +of the terrace, where the street slopes up nearly +level with it at the back by the cathedral, and +charged down on the rear of the enemy just as +the gun was swung round.</p> + +<p>As he did this I led my men round to the other +end of the terrace, where I saw that the men had +begun fighting among themselves, and thus I +knew that some of them were our friends and +were seeking to prevent the others from training +the gun on us. I halted, and ordered thirty of +my men to dismount and take the gun, which +they did with very little trouble, for the others, +seeing how they were outnumbered, either threw +down their arms and ran away, or surrendered. +Two of the officers were killed and another one +taken prisoner.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile Hartness had cleared the other end +of the terrace, and taken the other gun after killing +nearly every man who had defended it. But +scarcely had this been done than we heard the +rattle of drums and the sound of bugles, and saw +two columns of men marching at the double out +of the Plaza Del Cabildo, where the barracks +are, and the other past the Church of the +Jesuits, which is at the other end of the +square.</p> + +<p>'Are those friends or enemies, or both?' Hartness +asked me, when he had ordered the two guns<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[Pg 245]</a></span> +to be trained, one on each of the columns, and sat +down behind one of them himself.</p> + +<p>'If there are friends among them,' I said, 'they +know what to do, and when they have done it +you can fire.'</p> + +<p>Even as I spoke the two columns seemed to +break up. Scores of men broke out of the ranks, +shouting my name and cheering, and these all +ran together towards the fountain in the middle +of the square. The rest stopped in wonder and +confusion, their officers shouting furiously at them, +and ordering them to fire on the deserters. Some +obeyed, others, when they saw the guns trained +on them, ran away and hid themselves in doorways, +and then Hartness gave the order to +fire.</p> + +<p>Instantly every sound was drowned by the +terrible voices of the machine-guns. Hartness +glanced once along the barrel of his, and then +sent a torrent of bullets full into the middle of +the broken column that had come down from the +Plaza Del Cabildo. Then he moved it a little +from side to side, and then stopped. When the +smoke had drifted away I saw that there was not +a living being in that corner of the square, only +huddled heaps of corpses and bodies of animals. +Then he turned the gun on the other corner into +which the other gun was firing, and soon not a +man or an animal was left alive there also.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[Pg 246]</a></span></p> + +<p>When the firing ceased there were none left in +the square but those who had declared for us. +Hartness immediately formed these into two +columns. He led one of them, with one gun at +the head, into the street past the Church of the +Jesuits, and I led the other with the second gun +into the other street leading to the Cuartel, and +up these two streets we fought our way into the +Plaza Del Cabildo, in which we could hear more +fighting already going on.</p> + +<p>When we at last gained the square we found a +furious fight going on in front of the Cuartel +between one body of men who were defending the +building and another that was attacking it, but +which of these were friends or foes we did not +know until Tupac, heedless of the flying bullets, +ran out shouting in Quichua that Vilcaroya had +come. Shouts and cheers from the Cuartel soon +told us that our friends had got possession of it, +and after the city was won I learned that when +the two columns had started, leaving a third drawn +up in the square before the Cuartel, those who +were for us, remembering what I had said about +the gold that I would give for the machine-guns +and the ammunition, had broken their ranks and +made a rush for the doors to secure the three guns +which were in the courtyard, and so the fight had +begun, they seeking to hold the Cuartel against +the others until help came.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[Pg 247]</a></span></p> + +<p>As soon as I knew which were our enemies, by +their bullets coming singing about our ears, I had +the gun trained on them, and gave the word to +fire. But no sooner had it begun to rain its +tempest of death than we heard the other one +speak from the other end of the square, and such +a storm of bullets swept across the Plaza that +before many moments had passed there was not +a man or beast left alive in it.</p> + +<p>Then, when the firing ceased again, those who +had held the Cuartel, and had taken shelter in it +as soon as the machine-guns began to play, threw +open the doors to us and came out to welcome us, +and Francis Hartness and I clasped hands as +victors, and for the time being, at least, masters of +the ancient City of the Sun, for with the Cuartel +we had taken all the arms and ammunition stored +up in Cuzco, including the three Gatling guns +and the two Maxims; and more than this, the +whole of the native population of the valley was +in our favour.</p> + +<p>The fighting was now over, save for conflicts +that were going on in different parts of the city +between the Spaniards and the Indians, and I at +once had the Governor brought before me in the +Cuartel and told him by the lips of Hartness to +write a proclamation surrendering the city to us +and ordering all the officials to come in and make +their submission before sundown, threatening fire<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[Pg 248]</a></span> +and sack to every Spanish house if it was not +done. This he did, knowing well what would +befall him if he refused. At the same time Hartness +made a proclamation in my name in English +and Spanish promising perfect freedom and +security to all foreign merchants in the region +that was under our command.</p> + +<p>It was then about mid-day, and when I had +given Francis Hartness full authority to act in my +name as Governor of the city, which, speaking +fluent Spanish as he did, he could do better than +I, I took a guard of fifty men and went with +Tupac back to the Rodadero, and took ten of +the men into the Hall of Gold and bade them +carry out as much as they could, so that I might +keep my promise to the soldiers who had been +faithful to me, and while they were doing this +I went with Tupac to Djama's cell and found +him wailing and crying like a little child, and +beating his hands on the golden wall of his +prison and praying most piteously for a sight of +the daylight and a breath of the fresh air of +heaven.</p> + +<p>The Spaniard, when he heard us coming, began +to shriek and scream, and I bade Tupac tell him +that I would gag him for a day and a night if he +did not cease his cries. But to Djama I told +what had happened, and how Cuzco was already +mine, and promised I would let him out for a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[Pg 249]</a></span> +little while the next day if he would keep silence +for half-an-hour, and hearing this, he ceased +his cries, and I went on to the throne-room to +take the news of our victory to Ruth and Golden +Star.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[Pg 250]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER XII</h3> + +<h3>QUEEN AND CROWN</h3> + + +<p>I found them in the midst of an English lesson +which Golden Star was taking, sitting, still clad +in her Inca costume, between the professor and +Joyful Star, who also was dressed in the same +fashion. They all three rose to meet me as +I entered the throne-room, and Ruth coming +forward with both hands outstretched, as she had +never done before, said,—</p> + +<p>'What have you been doing all this time, +Vilcaroya, and why are you looking so worn +and haggard? Have—have you been fighting? +And why have you come back here alone?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I answered, taking her hands into mine, +and feeling all my blood turn to flame as their +gentle pressure thrilled along my nerves. 'Yes, +we have been fighting, and the Lord of Light +has fought upon our side, for we have gained +the victory, and the city is ours.'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[Pg 251]</a></span></p> + +<p>'Thank God for that!' she said; 'and that +no harm has come to you—or to Captain +Hartness.'</p> + +<p>'What! do you mean to say you have taken +Cuzco already?' cried the professor. 'How on +earth did you manage that so quickly?'</p> + +<p>'Because,' I replied, 'as I told you, my father +the Sun fought on my side and turned the +hearts of his children towards me, and so Francis +Hartness led them to speedy victory, and the +hearts of our enemies fainted within them, and +they have yielded. Now I have come to tell +you how it happened, and to take Joyful Star +back to the city, where she shall be hailed as +queen.'</p> + +<p>Then I sat down with them and told them all, +from the taking of the Governor and his officers +prisoners by the Sayacusca to the capture of the +Cuartel and the making of Francis Hartness +Governor of Cuzco. After that I went and put +on the imperial robes, which I had now a +double right to wear, and led them through the +gates of bronze into the Hall of Gold.</p> + +<p>Now, in the joy of my triumph, and the +greeting that Ruth had given me, I had forgotten +to bid her keep silence while going +through the hall, and when she saw the two +cells in the corner built up with blocks of gold +she stopped and said,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[Pg 252]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Those were not here the other night. What +have you had them built up like that for?'</p> + +<p>And before I could answer, Djama's voice, shrill +and trembling, rose out of the cell, crying,—</p> + +<p>'Ruth, Ruth, I am here! This is my prison. +It is a grave of gold. Curse the gold! Save +me, save me, Ruth, for I am going mad—and I +am your brother!'</p> + +<p>She stopped and took hold of my arm with +both her hands, and looked up at me. Her face +was very pale and her lips were trembling. Yet +though her voice was low, it was firm as she +said to me,—</p> + +<p>'I have no brother who is a liar and a traitor +to his friends; but, Vilcaroya, I had a brother +once who was very good and kind to me, and +for the sake of his goodness and kindness I ask +you to treat this—this prisoner of yours more +gently.'</p> + +<p>'Joyful Star can ask nothing to-day that I +could refuse,' I said. 'He shall be taken out +forthwith and lodged with all comfort, though +I must keep him safely.'</p> + +<p>'No, no, not till I am gone!' she whispered, +taking Golden Star by the arm and leading her +towards the passage. But, softly as she had +spoken, Djama heard her, and in his rage and +despair at her words he cried,—</p> + +<p>'You—you won't see me! But you will go<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[Pg 253]</a></span> +with your lover, your Indian master, who owes +his life to me! You will sell yourself for +his gold and be his wife. Oh, my God!—my +sister!'</p> + +<p>And then he raved in the madness that came +upon him, and his voice rang horridly out of +his cell and echoed shrilly through the hall and +the passages about it. I could feel no anger +against a man who was helpless and my prisoner, +so I followed Ruth without speaking; and when +we stood once more in the sunlight she turned +to me with a bright flush on her cheeks and +great tears in her eyes, and said very softly and +sweetly,—</p> + +<p>'He is mad, poor Laurens! he must be. That +terrible gold has turned his brain, or he could +never speak to me like that. You will not treat +him more harshly for it, Vilcaroya, will you, for +you know, after all, he is—I mean he was my +brother, and I loved him very much—once?'</p> + +<p>'Yes, he is mad,' I said; 'and yet the lips +of madness may speak truth, for what am I but +what he said?'</p> + +<p>'Have you forgotten what you asked me, or +what I answered when I kissed Golden Star in +the throne-room, that you can speak like that?' +she said, with one swift glance that told me I +had not asked in vain.</p> + +<p>What more she might have said I know not,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[Pg 254]</a></span> +but she had said enough to set my heart dancing +and my blood thrilling with a joy greater than +I had found in the speedy conquest of the city +of my fathers, and just then Tupac came to me +and said that a sufficient quantity of gold had +been taken out, and that all was ready to return +to the city. Then I told him what he was +to do with Djama and his fellow-prisoner, and +ordered Golden Star's litter and the horse for +Ruth which we had brought with us to be made +ready, and also a mule for the professor, and +when Tupac had returned we set out along the +road that leads to the Gate of Sand, I riding in +the midst of the troop, and Ruth on my left +hand and Golden Star in her litter on the +right.</p> + +<p>As we approached the streets, great crowds of +my delivered people thronged out to welcome us, +and when they saw me riding on my black horse, +dressed in the imperial robes and with the Llautu +on my brow, they set up a shout of joy and +welcome that went ringing along the streets and +through the squares and all over the city, and +so I rode on through the bareheaded throngs, +who bowed themselves almost to the earth +before me.</p> + +<p>As we were crossing the great Plaza, Ruth +looked about her with bright cheeks and shining +eyes and said to me,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">[Pg 255]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Is it not all like a dream, Vilcaroya? Only a +few weeks ago you came here poor and unknown, +and now you are a king come back to your own +again. Is it not wonderful?'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' I said, looking into her eyes with more +courage than before; 'but something more wonderful +even than that has befallen me. Is it not +so, my queen?'</p> + +<p>'Your queen is not crowned yet, your Majesty!' +she said, looking down, and yet not frowning, as +I half feared she would.</p> + +<p>'No,' I answered, 'nor shall she be till my work +is done, and the whole land that was my fathers' +is mine to give her, and then all that power and +gold and love can give her shall be hers.'</p> + +<p>'Give me the last and I shall ask no more,' she +said softly, chasing with that first sweet confession +from my heart the last lingering doubt of the great +blessing that my Father the Sun had bestowed +upon me.</p> + +<p>Thus we came to the front of the Cuartel, where +all the troops were already drawn up to do us +honour, and Hartness came out to greet us. He +stopped for an instant, and his cheeks paled a +little as he saw Ruth riding at my side, already +dressed as she would be when she was my queen. +But then the goodness of his honest heart spoke +from his lips, and he said, as he held out his +hand to me,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">[Pg 256]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Welcome, your Majesty! Majesties, I might +almost say, I suppose! The city is ours and +everything is quiet. Some of the officials have +come in and submitted; others I have had to put +under arrest, and runners are coming in every +minute from the other towns in the valley to say +that our plans have been carried out perfectly. +The rest of our work won't be as easy as this +has been, but we've made a very good beginning, +and, at anyrate, I think I can congratulate +your Majesty on having made your two most +important captures.</p> + +<p>He looked at Ruth as he said this, and though +her fair face flushed brightly and her eyes fell, yet +she spoke steadily enough when she answered +him, saying,—</p> + +<p>'You can hardly call me one of the spoils of war, +I think, Captain Hartness, though I confess that I +have surrendered at discretion. Now give me your +hand and help me down, and don't look so disconsolate, +for you are not nearly as unfortunate as you +think. There is an Inca princess for you also, a +real one, too. I have been teaching Golden Star +to say your name, and, do you know, she makes it +sound just like music with that sweet voice of +hers. See, here she is, and you shall hear her +say it.'</p> + +<p>I had dismounted meanwhile, and taken Golden +Star from her litter, and when the people saw her,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_257" id="Page_257">[Pg 257]</a></span> +her name ran swiftly from lip to lip, and a great +shout of delight rose up from thousands of throats +to welcome her back to life and the home of her +long-dead fathers. Then I took her hand and +Hartness's, and put hers in his, and said to +him,—</p> + +<p>'My friend, what I have taken I can in some +measure give back to you. Here is Joyful Star's +sister-soul and living likeness. I have seen her +newly-awakened soul look out of her eyes with +love upon you, as in good truth it well might, +for you are a true son of the Sun, though not of +our blood. In the days to come you may learn to +love her too, and then all will be well.'</p> + +<p>'Yes,' said Ruth, coming to his side, 'and better +than it could have been in any other way. The +very Fates themselves seemed to have arranged +all this, so it is not for mortals to rebel, Captain +Hartness.'</p> + +<p>He looked at her almost sadly for a moment, +and then he laughed a little and said,—</p> + +<p>'I should be more or less than mortal if I did, +Miss Ruth. But mind, if I am faithless, remember +it is you who have done the most to +make me so.'</p> + +<p>As he said this he took Golden Star's little hand +in his own and kissed it. As she felt the touch of +his lips a new light sprang into her eyes and +shone and danced there, and she said to me,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258">[Pg 258]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Why does the Son of the Great People do that, +and what have you said to him about me, my +brother?'</p> + +<p>'He has kissed your hand in loving greeting,' +I answered, 'and what I have said he will no +doubt tell you better some day when you can +speak together.'</p> + +<p>The bright blood in her cheeks told me that +she had understood me, and she turned her head +away, but she did not take her hand from +Hartness's, and so I gave my hand to Ruth and +led her into the Cuartel, and Hartness and Golden +Star followed us hand in hand amidst the cheers +of the soldiers and the joyful shouts of the +people.</p> + +<p>That night there were such rejoicings in Cuzco +as the City of the Sun had not seen since the +Spaniards came into the land. I distributed the +gold among the soldiers as I had promised, giving +to each man a piece of about two ounces in weight, +and they, who had never possessed, even if they +had ever seen, gold before, kissed it and fondled +it in their delight, and swore that they would fight +for me as long as one of them was left alive; +and then I spoke to them and told them that they +had but to be faithful and brave, and their English +leader would lead them to victory after victory, +until the whole land should be ours.</p> + +<p>Later on I sent Tupac with many men up to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259">[Pg 259]</a></span> +the fortress, and they brought down the Golden +Throne and the symbols of the Sun and great +quantities of gold and jewels, and they set the +throne in the midst of the terrace in front of the +cathedral, with silver seats on either side of it, +on the spot where in the olden time stood the +Palace of Viracocha; and on the front of the +cathedral, over the great doors, they fixed the +symbols of the Sun, and high above all, between +the two bell-towers, they placed a great +flagstaff.</p> + +<p>Before daybreak the next morning the square +was thronged with people, save for an open +space which the soldiers kept before my throne. +I took my place amidst an utter silence. Ruth +and Golden Star sat on my right and on my +left, and Francis Hartness, with a drawn sword +in his hand, stood by my throne to the right, +and on the terrace behind me, and on either +side, stood the Men of the Blood, dressed in +their ancient and long-forbidden costumes, with +which I had furnished them out of the stores in +the secret chambers of the fortress.</p> + +<p>No word was spoken and no sound was heard +over the whole city, and all eyes were turned to +the swiftly brightening eastern sky.</p> + +<p>The blue changed to silver and the silver to +crimson and gold. Then the sun, the glorious +image of the Lord of Life, uprose in all his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_260" id="Page_260">[Pg 260]</a></span> +sudden splendour, and as his rays fell on the +great golden jewel-rayed circle on the cathedral +front, the Rainbow Banner ran swiftly up to +the head of the flagstaff, and I, rising from +my throne, bared my head and, turning my +face to the rising sun, bowed myself before +it, and at the same instant every head in +the vast assembly was uncovered, and all, save +the soldiers, fell on their knees and stretched +out their hands to heaven in silent joy and +thankfulness.</p> + +<p>Then I lifted up my voice and spoke the +ancient Invocation to the Sun which generation +after generation of my fathers had spoken from +the same spot at the beginning of the feast of +Raymi, and when I had ended this the Children +of the Blood lifted up their voices after me and +sang the long-silenced and yet never-forgotten +hymn to the Sun, and then, standing before the +kneeling multitude, I replaced the Llautu on +my brow and proclaimed myself Inca and +supreme Lord of the Land of the Four Regions +in the name of my long-dead fathers, whose +divine right to lordship had been preserved in +me.</p> + +<p>And so I, Vilcaroya, son of Huayna-Capac, +first fulfilled the prophecy that had been spoken +in the Days of Darkness, and so did I come, as +had been said, from one life into another through<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261">[Pg 261]</a></span> +the shadow of death and the silence of the grave, +with her whose love, now changed, though no +less dear, had nerved me to face the ordeal of +the strangest fate that had ever befallen one +born in mortal shape.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_262" id="Page_262">[Pg 262]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER XIII</h3> + +<h3>HOW DJAMA PAID HIS DEBT</h3> + + +<p>It is one of the mysteries of this lower life of +ours that men, meaning to do good in all +honesty of heart, may yet do evil in the doing +of it, and it was thus with me in the hour of +my first triumph and rejoicing.</p> + +<p>I had pondered long and deeply over the +strange treachery of Djama, and I had talked +of it with Francis Hartness and the professor +until I had come to see that he was in +truth sorely afflicted with that madness which +is born of the lust of gold, which, as they +told me, is a disease of the soul that makes +timid men rash and mild ones fierce and +cunning, and may even turn the gentleness +of woman into the pitiless rage of beasts of +prey.</p> + +<p>It was through thinking of this that I came +to see that I was by no means blameless myself<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_263" id="Page_263">[Pg 263]</a></span> +for his madness and the treachery that had +come from it.</p> + +<p>In my own days and among my own people +gold was held precious only for its beauty and +its usefulness. We had not learned the art of +making it into money and buying men's soul +and bodies with it, but I had already lived enough +of my new life to see that now, save for the few, +gold was all and honour nothing; and knowing +this, I should also have known what I was +doing when I showed Djama the treasures in +the Hall of Gold. The sight of them had made +him mad, and, as my hand had shown them to +him, the blame of what he had done in his madness +was in part mine.</p> + +<p>All this I remembered in the hour when my +soul was filled with joy and my heart warm with +love, and I thought how great a pleasure I should +give to her who had given me the better part of +my own joy if I looked upon Djama with pity +and forgiveness and did an act of mercy as the +first deed of my new reign.</p> + +<p>So, when the ceremonial of my crowning was +over, I bade Tupac take some of my body-guard +and bring him before me from the place where +he had been lodged after his release from his +golden cell, and at the same time I quieted +the fears of Joyful Star by telling her what +was in my heart concerning him.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_264" id="Page_264">[Pg 264]</a></span></p> + +<p>They brought him unbound, but well guarded +by soldiers with bayonets on their rifles, up +the broad avenue which the parted throng had +made across the square in front of my throne.</p> + +<p>I saw him stare wildly about him as he came +near, gazing at the splendid sun-lit pageant like +a man in a dream, or one just awakened into +another world, as I had been after my long +death-sleep. But when he came near, and saw +me sitting in my royal state with Joyful Star +on my right and Golden Star on my left, both +robed as princesses of the Ancient Blood, his +face grew dark with passion, and his eyes, +losing their wonder, gazed in fixed and furious +hate at me—the man who was going to give +him his life, and much more that he had coveted +besides.</p> + +<p>They placed him between two soldiers before +me at the foot of the terrace steps above which +my throne had been set, and I was about to +speak and greet him kindly, when his anger +already got the better of him, and, with a +mocking smile on his lips, he said in a loud, +rough voice that was most unlike his own quiet, +even tones,—</p> + +<p>'Well, your Majesty, as I suppose you think +yourself for the present, I expected something +like this—to be brought out into the midst of +your fellow-savages and sentenced like a felon<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_265" id="Page_265">[Pg 265]</a></span> +before my own sister and the woman who, like +yourself, owes her life to me!'</p> + +<p>Then he laughed one of his strange, joyless +laughs, and went on before I could reply,—</p> + +<p>'Well, I suppose I mustn't grumble. You +have won, and to the victor go the spoils. +Now that you have apparently bought the girl +who was once my sister with your gold, and +I have given you your own sister-wife back, +you will be able to try an interesting experiment +in your old form of matrimony—'</p> + +<p>I saw Joyful Star shrink back in her seat +and turn her head away from him with a little +cry as he said these evil words, and they +angered me so, that—forgetting they were +spoken by a man who stood helpless before +me—I cried,—</p> + +<p>'Silence, liar and speaker of evil! or your +next words shall be the last that human ears +shall hear you speak. Are you still mad, or +have you forgotten that you were once a man?'</p> + +<p>He smiled such a smile as you may have +seen on the lips of one who has died in agony, +and said with a swift change in his voice,—</p> + +<p>'I beg your Majesty's pardon, and—and the +ladies' too. It was a most ungentlemanly thing +to say, and one should not forget one's manners +on the threshold of the next world—if there +is one. But come, your Majesty, you are<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266">[Pg 266]</a></span> +wasting your valuable time, and keeping all +these interesting savages of yours waiting. +You'll find I shall take it quietly enough. +What do you propose that it shall be—something +with boiling oil or red-hot pincers in it?'</p> + +<p>I knew that a man who could speak thus, +believing that he was about to die, must be in +a pitiful plight, and so I answered him sternly, +and yet without anger,—</p> + +<p>'Laurens Djama, I have not brought you +here to jest with you, nor yet, as you think, +to condemn you to die, though your life is +justly forfeit to me and my people, whom you +would have betrayed again to their oppressors. +Now, listen! You brought me back from +death to life, and for my life I will give you +yours, and for Golden Star's I will pay you +the price agreed on and something more. It +was by my foolish act that the madness of +the gold-hunger came upon you, and for that +I will give you your freedom; but not now, +for that would not be safe for me or my people, +since you have betrayed us once, and, knowing +what you do, might do so again. You shall +be taken hence to a pleasant and fertile valley, +where you shall have all freedom, save permission +to leave it until this war is over and +I am undisputed lord of the land of my fathers. +Then you shall take the wealth that shall be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267">[Pg 267]</a></span> +yours and go to your own country, or wherever +you please, so long as you do not remain +in mine, for here there is no place for you, +since my people do not forgive as easily as I +do. Now I have spoken; if there is anything +more that you can ask, and I can give with +safety, ask it.'</p> + +<p>Most men who had sinned as he had done +would have very willingly taken such forgiveness, +and Laurens Djama might have taken it +but for a seemingly small thing. While I was +speaking to him his eyes had wandered from +mine and were looking into Golden Star's. As +I ceased I felt her hands clasping my arm, and +heard her voice say tremblingly in our own +tongue,—</p> + +<p>'Save me, my lord and brother, save me! +Evil Eyes is looking into my heart and turning +it cold!'</p> + +<p>This Djama saw, though he did not understand +her words, and the sight brought the madness +into his blood again. He shouted with a +voice like the cry of a wild beast in pain,—</p> + +<p>'Curse you! I will have neither life nor +liberty from you, but I'll have your life for mine, +and that will pay me better!'</p> + +<p>As the last word left his lips he made a movement +so quick that my eyes could not follow it. +The next instant he had wrenched the rifle from<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268">[Pg 268]</a></span> +the hands of the soldier on his right hand and +levelled it at me. Even as he did so Joyful +Star flung herself with a scream upon my +breast and Hartness sprang forward from behind +my throne-seat.</p> + +<p>The rifle flashed. I heard a hissing sound +close to my ear and a deep groan and the fall +of a body behind me. In the same moment +Djama was seized and flung to the ground, +where he lay quite still and silent. I rose to +my feet, clasping Joyful Star for the first time +in my arms, and looked round. Hartness stood +beside me unharmed, but old <ins class="correction" title="Transcriber's Note: The original text reads 'Ullulo'">Ullullo</ins>, the first +friend that I had made in my new life among +my own people, lay dead behind my throne with +a bullet through his forehead.</p> + +<p>I had not forgotten that old training which +taught an Inca warrior to look on near-approaching +death with unmoved eyes and unshaken heart, +and this was only such a hazard as I had taken +a score of times before. I bade Hartness lead +Ruth and Golden Star into the temple behind +us, so that they should not see what was about +to be done. Then I took my place on the +throne again and ordered Djama to be raised +and stood on his feet.</p> + +<p>He rose of himself, very pale but calm and +strong in his own evil strength, fearing nothing, +as became a man for whom death had no terrors<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269">[Pg 269]</a></span> +and, it might be, few secrets. We looked each +other in the eyes in silence, and in the midst +of an utter stillness that had fallen on the vast +throng, until Hartness came back. Then I +said,—</p> + +<p>'That is enough, Laurens Djama. Choose +now what death you will die, but, for your own +sake and Joyful Star's, choose a quick one.'</p> + +<p>Although my voice was as the voice of doom +to him, yet he did not quail even then, for if his +heart was black it was very strong, and fear had +never entered into it. He drew himself up to the +full height of his stature and, looking me full in +the eyes, he said as quietly as I had ever heard +him speak,—</p> + +<p>'That choice is always mine, whether you give +it to me or not. You have threatened me with +death before and I have told you that you could +not kill me. Now watch and see if I spoke the +truth.'</p> + +<p>Then, with a soldier holding each of his arms +and two others grasping his shoulders, he drew +a quick, deep, gasping breath. The blood rushed +into his face till its pallor became purple. The +next instant it became deathly white again. His +jaw dropped, his eyes grew fixed and blindly +staring, and then his shape seemed to shrink +together like an empty bag, and he sank down +between those who were holding him.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_270" id="Page_270">[Pg 270]</a></span></p> + +<p>They pulled him upright again, and his head +dropped forward on his breast. He was dead—dead +as though the Llapa itself had struck him—and +so Laurens Djama, master of the arts of life +and death, passed out of the world of living men +by the act of his own will, though not of his own +hand.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271">[Pg 271]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3>CHAPTER XIV</h3> + +<h3>THE RE-KINDLING OF THE SACRED FIRE</h3> + + +<p>Now this story of mine is nearly done, for +there are but few things left for me to tell. It +is not for me to write of all the battles that +we fought after the City of the Sun and the +region about it fell into our hands, for to do +that is a task better fitted to the hands of him +who led my ever-growing hosts to victory after +victory until the whole land that had been my +fathers' was mine from north to south and from +the great rivers of the east to the Sea of the +Setting Sun, which you now call the Pacific +Ocean.</p> + +<p>It is enough for me to say that I used my +gold without stint, and that it did all and more +than the work I had been told it would do. As +we marched southward and westward to the sea, +army after army left those who were fighting +between themselves for the ruins of the land<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_272" id="Page_272">[Pg 272]</a></span> +and, having no real quarrel of their own, ranged +themselves under the Rainbow Banner and +fought with me for freedom and the ancient +faith of their long-dead fathers, and how city +after city welcomed me as I came to give +it peace and wealth instead of strife and +misery.</p> + +<p>My unforgotten story and the marvel of my +coming back from the days of our old-time +glories had sped like the leaps of the lightning +from mountain to mountain and valley to valley, +and every man in whose veins flowed even the +smallest drop of the Sacred Blood threw aside +the broken fragments of the oppressor's yoke +and came to give me his service.</p> + +<p>From other countries, too, and from far over +the sea, there came men to fight for me, men +whom Hartness had called from afar by speaking +to them over the lightning-wires, and they +brought ships with them, armed with flame and +thunder, which the promise of my gold had +purchased, and these took all the seaports for +me, while my ever-growing armies were taking +the cities of the inland valleys—all of which +those who would learn may read in the great +book which Francis Hartness and the professor, +who with Joyful Star have helped out these lame +words of mine, are writing together to tell how +the ancient empire of the Incas rose at my call<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273">[Pg 273]</a></span> +and the bidding of my gold—which I doubt +not was far stronger than I—out of the degradation +into which the oppressors had cast it, +and has even now begun to prosper again with +more than its former glory.</p> + +<p>But, as I have said, these things are not for me +to tell, since I have neither the skill nor the knowledge +to do so. What I have set down here is +only the story of my own awakening out of the +death-sleep into which the arts of the priests of +the Sun had cast me with Golden Star, and of +her return to join me in my new life. I have +told of that and of all that befell us afterwards, +and now there remains only the telling +of that which fulfilled our strange fates and +completed our happiness in the new world into +which those fates had brought us.</p> + +<p>Many weeks passed and grew into months +before the oppressors were finally subdued and +I found myself undisputed lord of all the land, +and, as I had promised Joyful Star, all this had +to come to pass before I would ask her to put +her hand into mine and take her place beside +me as my Coya and queen on the throne of +Huayna-Capac.</p> + +<p>But at length there was peace in the land and +we returned from Lima, the capital of the Spaniards, +where I had been proclaimed and acknowledged +Inca and Emperor of my ancient domains, to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_274" id="Page_274">[Pg 274]</a></span> +the City of the Sun, which many loving and +willing hands had cleansed of the abominations +of its new idolatries and made in some measure +fit to receive us, to crown our new lives with +such happiness as, with the help and blessing of +the Unnameable, we might be able to bestow +upon each other.</p> + +<p>The treasures of gold and silver and ornaments +of jewels, the rich hangings and the sacred and +precious emblems had been brought from the +Hall of Gold and the throne-room beneath the +Sacsahuaman and set up in the chief temple +of the Spaniards, which stands in the place +where the holy Temple of the Sun once +stood and is in great part built of the self-same +stones.<a name="FNanchor_F_" id="FNanchor_F_"></a><a href="#Footnote_F_" class="fnanchor">[F]</a></p> + +<p>It was the eve of the Feast of Raymi, or the +Coming of the Sun, which in the olden time we +counted as the beginning of the year, and I had +determined that this day should witness the +restoration of the old order and the beginning +of my own true happiness—so that night +Golden Star and I, as became the son and +daughter of the Royal Race and Sacred Blood, +watched and prayed according to the ancient<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_275" id="Page_275">[Pg 275]</a></span> +rites—she in a chamber of what had once been +the House of the Virgins of Sun, and I in the +purified temple—from the setting of the sun +until the first waning of the stars in the coming +dawn.</p> + +<p>Very early in the morning she was brought to +me in the temple by Tupac-Rayca—whom I had +in virtue of his pure blood and noble decent, +consecrated Villac-Umu or High Priest of the Sun, +and who had in turn invested such others of the +Blood as he thought worthy with the subordinate +dignities of the holy office. He and his attendants +were arrayed in the ancient priestly robes +and adorned with the sacred emblems of their +rank, and Golden Star was attired as a royal +Virgin of the Sun, in garments of white edged +with scarlet and decked with ornaments of pure +gold.</p> + +<p>Then we prayed together before the newly-set-up +altar, which stood over against the eastern +window of the Sanctuary, and when that duty was +ended, and while the growing light was yet dim, +there came to us Joyful Star, also arrayed as a +princess of the Blood, and Francis Hartness, +whom my thankful people had already named +Viracocha, after one of our golden-haired hero-gods +of the olden time.</p> + +<p>After them came all those of the Sacred Race +that were left in the land—men and matrons,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276">[Pg 276]</a></span> +youths and maidens—all dressed in the long-forbidden +garb of their forefathers, and ranged +themselves in two silent, orderly ranks down +the sides of the Sanctuary, waiting with patient +eagerness for that which they had been bidden +here to see.</p> + +<p>Above the altar hung the great golden Emblem +of the Sun, upon which the radiant glance of +the Lord of Light would first fall through the +circular window in the eastern wall, and on it +was a pyramid of wood anointed with scented +oils; for here was soon to be re-kindled—if our +Lord the Sun should smile on the new fortunes +of his long-suffering children—without the aid +of human hands, that sacred fire first lit by +Manco Capac and Mama Occlu, son and +daughter of the Sun, and which had burnt unquenched +through all the ages that had passed +from the founding to the fall of our ancient +empire. Beside it lay a cone-shaped vessel of +burnished gold, in the depths of which the +Sacred Fleece awaited the touch that was to +change it into flame.</p> + +<p>When all were assembled, Tupac-Rayca mounted +the steps of the altar, and, facing the silent throng, +began to speak in the ancient and unforgotten +tongue and said,—</p> + +<p>'Children of the Sun, sons and daughters of +those whose ancestors in the unremembered days<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277">[Pg 277]</a></span> +received the divine command to create the empire +over which they ruled with ever-growing glory +until, by the inscrutable decrees of the Unnameable, +the destroyer and oppressor were permitted +to come into the land, listen with open ears +and thankful hearts to the words which our +Father shall put into my mouth to say to +you!'</p> + +<p>All bowed their heads and crossed their hands +over their breasts as he spoke, and after a little +silence he went on,—</p> + +<p>'The last of the Villac-Umus who stood where +I am standing told your fathers and mine of the +near-approaching night of gloom and desolation +that was about to fall upon the Land of the Four +Regions. For what sins of his children our Father +permitted that night to eclipse the bright day +of their empire we know not, nor is it lawful for +us to inquire. Let it be enough for us to believe +that, grievous as the doom was, it could not have +been anything save the inflexible justice of the +Unnameable.'</p> + +<p>Again they bowed their heads, and there was +silence for a little space until he went on, speaking +this time in a gladder voice,—</p> + +<p>'But, stern as that justice was, it was yet +not untempered with mercy, for with the words +of doom there came from our Father, by the +lips of his minister, the holy Anda-Huillac,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278">[Pg 278]</a></span> +those words of hope and promise which from +that day to this have been handed down in +secret, yet unforgotten, from father to son and +from mother to daughter, and which now for +the first time since then may be spoken openly +in the land:—</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>'"<i>To that Son of the Sacred Race who, for +honour and faith and love, shall take the hand +of a pure virgin of his own holy blood and with +her pass fearless through the gate of death into +the shadows which lie beyond, shall be given the +glory of casting down the oppressor and raising +the Rainbow Banner once more above the Golden +Throne of the Incas. On that throne he shall sit, +and wield power and mete <ins class="correction" title="Transcriber's Note: The original text reads 'ont'">out</ins> justice and mercy +to the Children of the Sun when the gloom that is +now falling upon the Land of the Four Regions +shall have passed away in the dawn of a brighter +age.</i>"</p></div> + +<p>'Sons and daughters of the long-dead, turn +your eyes and see how the eastern skies are +swiftly brightening with first rays of that long-looked-for +dawn. This is the morning of our +deliverance, for our deliverers stand here before +us, and with your own eyes you may look upon +those who, in the strength of their love and +faith, dared the doom to win the promise, for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_279" id="Page_279">[Pg 279]</a></span> +here in the living flesh stands that Vilcaroya, +son of the great Huayna-Capac, and there +beside him is Golden Star, that virgin of the +Royal Race who of her own will joined hands +with him in the wedlock of death, and whose +pure soul has dwelt with his in the Mansions +of the Sun while ten generations of men +have lived and died awaiting their return to +the land.</p> + +<p>'To us, more blessed, it has been given to see +that which our fathers waited for in vain. To +us our Lord Vilcaroya and our Lady Golden Star +have come back from the shadows of death into +the light of life and glory of victory. Already +you have seen the oppressor pay the price of life +for life, and blood for blood, and shame for shame. +You have seen our Lord seated on the golden +throne of the Divine Manco with the Rainbow +Banner waving high above him, and now the +moment has come for you to see the fulfilling of +what yet remains of the promise unfulfilled. +Behold the visible presence of our Father comes +near to smile once more on his children long left +in darkness!'</p> + +<p>While he was speaking these last words the +light in the eastern sky had brightened fast +until a sunray leapt over the lower rim of the +window and shone on the painted ceiling of the +Sanctuary. At a sign from Tupac-Rayca,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_280" id="Page_280">[Pg 280]</a></span> +Golden Star took up the vessel in which lay +the Sacred Fleece, and, standing in the middle +of the altar on the highest step, held it poised +in her hands above her head, with her pale, +fair face and shining eyes upturned towards the +window.</p> + +<p>Foot by foot the light crept along the roof, +broadening and brightening as it went, till it +touched the western wall. Then, ever followed +by the anxious eyes of the silent throng, it +descended until the great Symbol of the Sun +flashed and flamed in its radiance. Still lower +it sank and the burnished vessel that Golden +Star held to receive them caught the gathering +rays and glowed as though filled with liquid +fire.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 396px;"><a name="Illustration_Now_the_moment_for_the_giving" id="Illustration_Now_the_moment_for_the_giving"></a> +<img src="images/illus6.jpg" width="396" height="600" alt="Now the moment for the giving of the Sign had come." title="" /> +<span class="caption">Now the moment for the giving of the Sign had come.</span> +</div> + +<p>Now the moment for the giving of the Sign +had come. A faint wreath of pale blue smoke +curled upwards from the Sacred Fleece. It grew +darker and denser, and then a little tongue of +flame leapt out from the midst of it. At the +same instant Tupac seized the vessel and held +it upturned over the pyramid of wood upon +the altar. The burning fleece fell down upon +the anointed wood, a long shaft of fire shot +upward, and, as the descending sunrays fell over +the face and bosom of Golden Star, the voice +of Tupac rang out in an exultant chant through +the silence, saying,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_281" id="Page_281">[Pg 281]</a></span>—</p> + +<p>'Rejoice, Children of the Sun, rejoice! for +your Father has once more looked in kindness +and blessing upon you, and with the radiant +glance of his eyes he has re-kindled the +long-quenched fire which henceforth shall burn +upon his altar as long as his visible presence +shall make bright the heavens and beautiful the +earth!'</p> + +<p>As he ceased, Golden Star's voice rose up +clear and sweet, singing the first words of the +Hymn to the Sun—as I alone of all that throng +had heard her sing them in the days that were +no more. Then the Children of the Blood raised +their voices too, and out of the fulness of their +thankful hearts poured forth their first tribute +of praise and thanksgiving to Him who had +broken the yoke of the oppressor and given +back light and joy and peace to the long-darkened +Land of the Four Regions.</p> + +<hr style='width: 45%;' /> + +<p>When the Hymn to the Sun was ended and +the Children of the Blood had received the +blessing of Tupac, there was yet one more +ceremony to be performed before the rejoicings +of the Feast of Raymi began. There is little +need for me to tell you what it was. In love +as in war I had striven and conquered, and now +the dearest of my rewards, dearer far than +wealth or empire, was to be made mine by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_282" id="Page_282">[Pg 282]</a></span> +the free gift of her who was herself that which +she gave.</p> + +<p>Two of the priests brought forth the +marriage-font and placed it in front of the +altar, and Joyful Star stood on the one side +of it and I on the other and we joined hands +across it.</p> + +<p>It was a double vessel of gold, formed of +two twin cups, and between them there was +a hole stopped by a golden plug, to which +a little chain was fastened. The cup on my +side was filled with blood-red wine and that +towards Joyful Star with pure water, crystal +clear.</p> + +<p>Tupac took our hands in his and parted them, +saying as he did so,—</p> + +<p>'To meet and to part is the lot of man and +woman upon earth, yet when two true souls +meet and two faithful hearts are joined even +death can part them but in seeming, for in +the bright halls of the Mansions of the Sun +they shall dwell for ever in the blessed presence +of our Father!'</p> + +<p>So saying, he joined our hands again, and +drawing out the golden plug, he pointed to the +mingling fluids and went on, speaking now to +each of us in turn,—</p> + +<p>'Here, Vilcaroya Inca, and you, Joyful Star, +daughter of a conquering race and well-beloved<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_283" id="Page_283">[Pg 283]</a></span> +of our Lord, see the emblem of the union between +you! As the strong red wine colours and +strengthens the pure water, so, Joyful Star, shall +the stronger nature of thy chosen husband colour +and strengthen thine, and, as the pure water +tempers and purifies the wine, so, Vilcaroya +Inca, shall the gentler and purer nature of her +who is henceforth thy wife and queen by the +rites of our ancient law, soften and purify thine +according to the will and purpose of the Unnameable, +who to this end sent man and woman +upon earth that together they might possess +and enjoy it, each helping the other, man +making the world fruitful and beautiful by his +labour, and woman sweetening his toil by the +reward of her love and her constancy.'</p> + +<p>Then he raised his hands above our heads +as we bowed them together over the emblem +of our mingling lives, and said again,—</p> + +<p>'Son and daughter, man and wife, who have +met from afar, and who in this solemn act +have sworn in the all-pervading presence of +the Unnameable to lead each other from this +your meeting-place to the dim border of the +shadow-land which lies between this world +and the threshold of the Mansions of the Sun, +may the blessing of our Father clothe your +brows with honour and fill your hearts with +everlasting love and trust, and may He guide<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_284" id="Page_284">[Pg 284]</a></span> +your feet to walk in pleasant places from now +even to the end!'</p> + +<p>As he ceased our hands parted, only to meet +again a moment later after we had stepped +aside to yield up our places at the marriage-font +to Francis Hartness and Golden Star.</p> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_F_" id="Footnote_F_"></a><a href="#FNanchor_F_"><span class="label">[F]</span></a> This is not quite correct, although a natural mistake on the part +of the Inca. It is not the Cathedral of Cuzco, but the Church of +Santo Domingo, which stands on the site of the ancient Temple of +the Sun. It is by far the finest church in Cuzco. The Cathedral +faces the great square.</p></div> + + + + +<h2>THE END</h2> + + +<p><i>Coiston and Coy. Limited, Printers, Edinburgh</i></p> + +<div class= 'notes'> +<p>Transcriber's note:</p> + +<p>List of corrections:</p> + + +<ol><li><p>"Anahauc" corrected into "Anahuac"</p> + +<p>page 206 and bid Anahauc and Ainu close the door</p> +<p>page 208 Anahauc came and prostrated himself</p></li> + +<li><p>"Ullulo" corrected into "Ullullo"</p> + + + +<p>page 288: Ullulo, the first friend</p></li> + +<li><p>"ont" corrected into "out"</p> + +<p>page 298 mete ont justice and mercy</p></li></ol> +</div> + +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ROMANCE OF GOLDEN STAR ...***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 20173-h.txt or 20173-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/1/7/20173">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/1/7/20173</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/20173-h/images/illus1.jpg b/20173-h/images/illus1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6516584 --- /dev/null +++ b/20173-h/images/illus1.jpg diff --git a/20173-h/images/illus2.jpg b/20173-h/images/illus2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6befa3e --- /dev/null +++ b/20173-h/images/illus2.jpg diff --git a/20173-h/images/illus3.jpg b/20173-h/images/illus3.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..da43479 --- /dev/null +++ b/20173-h/images/illus3.jpg diff --git a/20173-h/images/illus4.jpg b/20173-h/images/illus4.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2915aac --- /dev/null +++ b/20173-h/images/illus4.jpg diff --git a/20173-h/images/illus5.jpg b/20173-h/images/illus5.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c807820 --- /dev/null +++ b/20173-h/images/illus5.jpg diff --git a/20173-h/images/illus6.jpg b/20173-h/images/illus6.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc1309a --- /dev/null +++ b/20173-h/images/illus6.jpg |
